Home

HP Scanner 3495A User's Manual

Contents

1. SESI AdivWixOBddY Q3AY 30 E tas NO NMELL i r oe 4 SUI 9 9 0 1 Nado ua N346 BETIS 1 iD i Havel Ssaucxty 123735 X 3avosq 2od i 35012 35012 399538 35079 BWASSY TOUINOS a d id ONIN dO errr p EEL i p T AX TI 3405 4 1 EFFI San 1051300 3974018 Bt m ACIE 000000000 IANNIS H Sev pau sia 9 84801 i BRE 09056 Gt 6053 0000 Lt Vode ELEN el 01 cont i El 8 LBD 5 6724 0000 n 149 8 4 6753 8000 ei Ud LS 9 j 1 BYEZ 5 snes 0000 los i NBE HSGHE 3 nva 0008 US ius Utd a gt 664 0000 21 9 SM c Pope x en d 6000 LU 103820 9Qr 7 9inBr4 17846 5 57053 09000 ot dich 0 ein 9inieubig t 40H 6 po 8 SOSH ddl ai X ug 3695 9226 bs 6nt4 0000 51 6 00060882200860339080818 aie 2 6n d 0800 ENES PAPA Et nico 2 837 8683 OL a4nieubis 2 NAL 5
2. 5 p FE 4 8 lt lt om e TIT Se i Hy312 vivd 199 i NOLNSLIW i ELY FFNAZLNI 5 Ch vlvg 4 3 HV31O VIVO 4 E m f BOVJE3ENI t mem TER PI ner 5 m EE E ne Ui 03193009 VIVO LON 1 MN a WLW MOS 0 34 739010 d WE NE OS 99010 TCA A eS3udav xa 117 avalo viva VAVO 8 Qe i 1413 11 i d 3 lida 5 JSON TVINS 04 fU nueodi H i H 9Q E 1 5533939 34613 3X3 el Dip y ouo o REO py t 750 AAA MG ES More OU guide Wow ANOS NP ri cT MEUS mM se DIO ALS 1 OY yey IDS Out 2 8H 2H 985 guy by eae c SS3HQQV LNSANYLSNI iiin n Aaa na AAAA AAAA aanmaak Aia 3 HOIG HW tsl 1 COWON a Met CIE Mio 299981 120 oe 7 as 4 p 39973045 viva YOLIINNOD 0599 A
3. 5 ica RS ES PEERS e RER ER 0045 221757 Actuator Relay Locator C 9 Figure 7 Figure 7 C 10 ni ff the relay as show Slide the metal reta 4 REMOVED RETAINER RAD ESE Com uu uu APRI TTA TE 5 Mua VII SAEI EET ES VARY EAR EHER ERU E ES 2320 SESE 77275 3 od QM ee a AAAI D MESSE OE ITA ES IGE E 214552202245 IE ELAN See Hu cq ie 2 21527 a LES 2 2 EL PASS ILS 422 Be GIGS VR EEE 22272 BR 2 TIRO T 555273 13215222 BER ees 222 AS lA 222 9 552 s TRIER es IRA ERIN PRESTAN POPE REE AR BESSERE 2 5 a CSP BEER ES TIRER Actuator Relay Removed from the Board Assembly 7 10 Figure it from the board Li
4. Mother Bd Assy Standard PC Assy Standard Connector Assy Standard interface and Control Standard Extender Assy Standard Chassis Standard 03495 66505 03495 66510 None 03495 64101 03495 64103 Low Therma Display Options 0018003 Low Thermal Logic Assy Options 001 amp 003 Low Thermal Channel Assy Options 9018003 Low Thermal Terminal Assy Option 001 Reference Connector Assy Option 003 03495 66506 Actuator Display Assy Option 002 03495 66520 Actuator Logic Assy Option 002 03495 66521 Actuator Terminal Assy Option 002 None Actuator Channel Assy Option 002 03495 66505 03495 66540 03495 66525 03495 66541 03495 66542 03495 64114 03495 64115 Duo Decade Reference Connector Assy Option 005 as 03495 66508 Fast Controller Assy Option 100 Replaces A4 These assemblies are not available individually Low Thermal Display Options 004 amp 005 Duo Decade Logic Assy Options 00481005 Duo Decade Channel Assy Options 00481005 Duo Decade Coil Assy Options 004 amp 005 Duo Decade Reed Assy Options 0048005 Duo Decade Terminal Assy Option 004 Model 3495A These servicing instructions are for use by trained service personnel only To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified ta do 50 un Model 3495 Se
5. 1 t 1 SN3L 4 a 1910 PE OO a aan cr un HES 4550 HAL e b m P A n TETTE EE UA RAEN A Wl 1 1 i i i E AA aos 1 e 8 358010 30030 4 f 71 Hinge lt T im SM 13 ig v Gre icm e Ecquid ond MS PRESE AMEN SONIS M lis eT 5 1 PO TENSILE po 4 3974015 145 SN3L m EN 2 2 1 Gres 30790 123735 MG gt JJ HIG Bes Salt aan PETS mmm rr ret 1 Ped die Pd vi i 4 2 3 MASSEY TVWIBRI ROT gt i ANV 19 1 9333 assi ds i BER j amp LIN emp MM Es y i 1 AMO Avg 4 it JR b 3 E Cl mm nn n n H 7 e i TE 1 BARS cf E i i Y gt
6. sem eut IZ A NAHM 3499330 ONY viva 300930 SUONORIISUI spueurutoo usmSurisip SI snq 9U NLV pow UL st gj gqH 10 8 st pue SI AVG SRA OJUO wep sayore Sq eouenbas ayeyspuey 1 10ssoo0idOu U OC H L sou oxeuspueu jdooxe soun 1910 seziperrur pue 1ossooo1dougu ay 01 suejsi un ISUUEIS our it eui uou ure1201d HHH sse1pp N QU S9ZIj BIUT 102294 41 11235 v UO WIN AIMAS 3 120 jepooep SIN WOW OIM 0ss3901doueu ZN JO 51915405 40014 GrAL i ami UI UMOYS 218 ISI sa s 00002 HEN 7713 7 33018 TOHINOJ BiFri ae suore1edo poods voya suoneordde jueureinseour 10 oq pynoys pue 219 puo sesodind 3591 10 pinous iojpedeo sm Zumpersur Indut poj2ouuoo aq 20908482 SIAL Surumuei8olq gp gH 1812135 uonoeg ur pessnosrp ore pue 918 x o q pue ouueqo j
7. Serial Number 03495400101 See Note below IMPORTANT NOTICE This loose leaf manual does not normally require a change sheet All maior change information has been integrated Into the manual by page revision In cases where only minor changes are required a change sheet may be supplied f the Serial Number of your instrument is lower than the one on this title page the manual contains revisions that do not apply to your instrument Backdating information given in the manual adapts it to earfier instruments Where practical backdating information is integrated into the text parts list and schematic diagrams Backdating changes are denoted by a delta sign An open delta A or lettered delta on a given page refers to the corresponding backdating note on that page Backdating changes not integrated into the manual are denoted by a numbered delta 4 which refers to the corresponding change in the Backdating section Section VIII To help minimize the possiblity of electrical fire or shock hazards do not expose this instrument to rain or excessive moisture Manual Part 03495 90012 Microfiche Part No 03495 90062 Copyright Hewlett Packard Company 1974 P O Box 301 Loveland Colorado 80537 U S A Printed November 1977 HEWLETT Mp CERTIFICATION Hewlett Packard Company certifies that this instrument met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Hew
8. XWABSSY Bu Ex Pod Pot EE u E I Bi 2i bissl d un ann an a meme El L IOINO SSPEO i ere ra dai re A O ee pa ome i anm nun i h Sen ee rayon CUR UE Ea e TOR ROM oe de a 7 gie x Ne Ny NY NV Ww Y d 783565 N NV d Y wow o w E s 0 4 de OP m EUM ONNULO OF M Kd 2 oW pa 2 E 15 ER sE 5 vg ay OF Sy iv Br Y or VON AL voy VENUE we y gt vi 2 4 5 S e gt 5 5 3 3 BR A MV OY Y E AS AAA LA E AMENA MERA BER Y 4 Y Y Y Y UN N ib dE d hd ae KE AEN ERDE ais i i i 7 1j i i i i Rt En mn A COND Gel coke ey 1224 p F Lcx o lg aM EMEN Masa h EL TE gt amp d 666 ooc 066 6446 6466 EF bd Ws H t 1 i L 1 1 cs 7 J i 2 d 2 i
9. 9 uig 9 ul OOD GEG id SAN 990 uid M mut Hadi BrE B uid ELEOTVHLY t1 Wid 5 M 060 6nEd 6694 4029 i utd b 5 515 1381302 a s aanyeubs spaniu 2 S auMpRUheg MOA Sues 2843 22754 Gr sesmeubis UUs DEIN ASOD ON 9524 1 8 ay r x as 14048 oseuf ein ON tnl 534 Roda NET GE utg Zn 654 0000 HORE Si ld SNC HOE td 0606 6n d Zi Ln 827195 6506 6ncd aL uig HHO BEd HOMA BNE ould DEDO EN EA y id 0606 5ntd 9 uid 39940 sy84n3BUBES Ged BOOS 11 dig 65 51 asejday puna OL in 1045 3284160 esa aly INGA 8 uid ZA OLA S34 S3A 0 0 01 Vid PNGE HSHES Id LU T dHOY SarmmieuDrS WOGS s tof El Utd pin 5 pee zin ELA Payo SAA S a
10. kb wu j j 1 DE Li ree 4 4444 peer mw erm int i ror 2 The Operator input identifying a specific reed test will then cause the controller to print of the three printouts shown below 7 5 Section Vii Model 3495A Table 7 3 Controller instructions and Operator Responses Cont d SPARE GH REEDE oioi ae a ae CLOSE Sh zs OPEN Dea OF 3 POS SH PRESS OMT ESEGUITE HHEM RERDY un DU pud 4 42 rapes ofa espe jun pe Bosal ide pe ep re 4 oe rr ra 141 de gt Eee Besse alat tt 054 d 4 r h 44 mw 444 4444 444 s the U 444 dss 173 LES I iR H 4 Hb d t rid 1 t 1 244 1 Ler 4 pr po 1 1 444 t Fiber nm udo Nt E ms n 4 ree dun 1 pap Pane m dint yu ph 444 anm kx P rok eer n ie gran de 4 2 24 4 P j i 1 Hl 1 Pe dan 14447 une 1 uu a 3 5 E ns FE The printouts identify the reed test selected and proper setting of the 3 positions switch 3 When the program has been continued the controller displays the follo
11. 5 281 Uig Vid 5nz2za 9990 ened 90900 576 6099 engd 0000 4953 4414 Di B68d ITSP Gl Mid cure 8hd 0319 ig SENGEY 4 1854 9n Bunzeubtg 8 B2bd ainyeubis 9 ula 6n si SBA yi 400 sgunigubtc 2894 any El Wed v stg 290 BADLY 34 amp Uid EN 51 ung 219510 Puy US Ef soe dali sorda SOJMBU S ANOA 10 5037 peg emeqod f c campos Gig 1581 VS uongo spurt aa 2 SATION J od ON 6182 0000 y nosyi sud Z BEd BOO ON gi ybnosys 6 Suid 15 ont 2384109 sam sui say al ON 972 0000 Bcd Bode 6753 0808 PE Mid uid tld 6nEd OBOE gif 4994 4 1108014 9012 5 in soe day 099 0 yp uid OE saog 808198 OD 9 Utd OLN 5200 3291109 sainieubtG ZIN UHR Ol Bid HOYEN ula Z Mid 2
12. IQ Sun O2V 8 WON uiejbeig 1043409 pue aveau py ERGE O VS6PE 96 18 338vN3 108738 3lViS LX3N VIVO SSN 61 02 06 divis LON 38016 5 31 318VN3 Le shg VNOLLIONOO 39375 5209030 53135 309930 399530 31915 fol iSl 3031003 5 31 id 5973 2 3953900 aassaucav sS3uiaQvNn 8 NBLSIINN 5535007 SNQ AHL N31Sl 38vN3 SS3HQQV SNQ IN tv 5533099 LNSWAYLSNI AQ 19 NIV xdi OVON GAAN Ava 2010 101 AAA VAI A an 8 NOH 3 Model 3495 SERVICE GROUP A Section USB USA UTA U19A U13C Ul3A U13C o d y E EEE B ln E NRFD IFC AT D6 D7 e CBH e CBH ADR Ready Mode NRFD Enable I NRED Enable H NRED Enable IH The 3495A is ready to A valid non address command The 3495A is not Controls NRFD receive commands has been received and the ready to receive instruc except as over instructions 3495A is not ready for a new tions ridden by Enable ASCH character or Enable 7 27 NRFD goes true to hold up communication on the until the 3495A can recognize a char
13. 6 1 Display A21 22 23 7 12 Code List of 5 6 2 7 D 1 Replaceable Parts 40 7 D 10 Replaceable Assemblies 6 2 7 D 2 Replaceable Parts 5 25 41 Recommended Service Equipment 7 A42 45 46 7 D 12 Preliminary Check 7 2 7 1 Replaceable Parts 28 7 E 10 Controller Instructions and Operator Responses ROC Rc 7 5 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS Page Figure Page Field Installable Low Thermal Decade 1 6 3 14 Thermocopule Circuit 7299 3 19 Field Installable Actuator Decade 1 6 3 15 vs for Common Thermocouple Materials 3 20 Field Installable Thermocouple Decade 1 7 3 16 The Reference Connectors Field Installable Low Thermal Duo Decade 1 7 Functional VIEW as cura we eure 3 21 Field Installable Thermocouple Duo Decade 1 8 3 17 Common Thermocouple Structures 3 23 Field Installable High Speed Controller 1 8 3 18 Connecting the Guard 3 24 o 1 8 3 19 Burst Measurement System 3 25 Power Cord 2 1 3 20 Sample Burst Measurement Program 3 25 Location of Option Assemblies 2 2 4 1 Switching Time and Thermal Offset Front and Rear Views 2 4 Voltage Test Wiring Diagrams
14. ana 144 2 NC has ir b 4 1 t LN 4 4 H t s 1 bh 444 4 e LI 414 4 444 D rr den t 773 41 rhe 444 1 re har abria a Li IH ras js 4 44419 i 441 ate bes 1499 1 444 t 444 p 414 44284 424 i P age p n be n T i vr Im o Ja etn 4 n s 3 f 3 4 i j 4 t Peet E us 1 M se u So be E C de m af NU k Fin 3 d P hei Me ut 4 9 s 74345 qnit i enm j ER nm par 433 pa br 5 In In i i I4 5 pu m i pr Hh i bere ud sss F 1 Jun etr Dn TTE s 1 00 M jm 4 40 BRI 44 4240 4 yeh 44 US 2 y 3 1 5 eth 1 t ns 1 r p 1 us po s IT 1 ur nd nr 44 aan 1 ber 0 re 142 H 1 4 4 rid x A nor dd d 3 m TM m TE b lae pee f 444 the ner er 1 nar ae 4 i 4 30441 Hees rro 2044 toU gunas 1 1 4 1 i 1 4 H A pe E Vine ur i pu t dd i li e nn d oer un ver des adas m
15. HSRMOCOUPLE 3 2 BEA TEMPERATURE MgASUAEMENT C TYPE T TMERMOCOUTPLE 41 Po 1 HU AA TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT C Lj 1000 1590 16 31 ci IAN TYPE THERMNCOUPLE DYNAMIC senna en Fr 506 1 00 1209 1300 400 1500 TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT TO TYPE THEAMOCOUALE 3 2 E Rene m MR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT TYPE amp PA amp DCOUPL TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT Oc Accuracy curves refiect the following representative sources ot error Reference Temperature Errors Thermistor Accuracy 2 ead resistance 01 C curve fit Temperature Gradients Along Terminals from thermistor static environment Gastian I Measurement Errors 2 uV Scanner Offset Voltage 3495A AA 1 3 ACNE Model 3495 1 23 The environmental conditions listed in Table 1 2 must be present for the hp Model 3495A to meet stated specifications Some definitions are helpful _ Steady State Environment An environment where the ambient temperature varies no more than 1 degree centigrade at once 41 C b Dynamic Environment An environment where the ambient temperature varies no more than 5 degrees centi section 1 grade at once 45 C or where the rate of change of ambient temperature is no more than 5 degrees centigrade
16. impregnated not separately replaceable pes TEE RE incandescent cs dr RAN Sa tantalum Bea aie war ace Wait A ss ohmis TR temperature coefficient ERE ceramic aan order by description 2 titanium dioxide OMT bie ah Wee ees coefficient kild oo kilohmis 1013 ohms OD outside diameter toggle COTA TETUR ER common kHz kilohertz 10 3 hertz o TM tolerance ty ocr oe Stade composition E peak inm cn trimmer A RIDE SE connection 1 MOUCTO D ov ere ia 5 TSTR transistor linear taper DE printed circuit deposited 04 logarithmic taper pF picofarad s 10712 farads volt s DPDT double pale double throw Di peak inverse voltage vacw alternating current working voltage DESDE sta aa double pole single throw mA miltiampereis 10 amperes p o AE Ii a CE MTM ew Roe variable Miri megahertz 108 hert pos position s direct current working voltage elect
17. 928 TIY 0201 lt 3501 HV 099 ON IN 090 56874 3593 Payeg 280070 SITE 4 395 CeO Py 3H AWTS 335 SISSH D 3NNYHO HN VIV luiid 061 OLDE 0001 4 vip PUBLUDINSLIA 066 076 fAUGEY 3587 01 38144 104 046 bays SHE 096 1018014 HUHGOUS jgnoii 4AULUBIS 058 abuey 5 001 308125 055 075 631 Zl Alot DbullQuis 2QNUOJL tS CE Daa e iusti Fo4n sea Al UAIG 800 ON 098 GSE 15697 18 324 026 088 008 28 LOA HOON Ar ds q 0611 OELL 15415 auru UY 328196 OE DEB ise 028 OLB indu 193340 084 159 indui DEL e CIS LS 38 OL TI3NNVH2 1591 094 5343 ON HAUNN UUELT 19354 CEL 0031531 38 73NNVvHO SUIT Avr 1594 OHT des sos NIRA 3 5 ANDI 5538 9134 0811 0911 0027089 019 088 0C6 003 spunses 9 HEM
18. COMMON SHB ae MISH 4 MT III ON 1 0 Ego Low 4 i e REA i ge a E DECADE GEO 2 LOSE 46029538 4 aa EE 2 HIGH COMMON RELAY ASSEMBLY TEHSAL ASSEMELY Ei DEZENT nenne Figure 3 10 Functional Diagram for 4 Wire Ohms Scanning Low Thermal Model 3495 Section IH IO X MATRIX CHANNELS eee Y p STIMULUS F 4 8 LOAD RESPONSE A ar 6 SCANNER p OD 9 Im ACTUATOR DECADES ee Th SCANNER 2 cae vane i qe o DEVICE UNDER TEST 34954 8 3391 Figure 3 43 Matrix Scanning 3 103 Figure 3 13 demonstrates how Actuator channels may be connected in a matrix arrangement for connecting stimulus and response instruments to the pins of a device under test Any instrument may be connected across any two pins of the device and any number of the instruments may be connected simultaneously Both scanners are given the same HP IB Listen address and the eight decade Logic assemblies are each given one unique Close address The channels must be closed in pairs for instance channels 9 and 18 connect the counter to the first two pins of the device Matrix scanning permits multiple measurements to
19. ue pue pouuguo OT 01 pezeduroo 10112 21915504 2 10 Y SI 111891 eu T0101 OSLT YIH ur 1019591 c g 514 jonpold parjroeds VA 1 19901 0 pz oi JWaLINO sarmbal 921 05 Tp 2 epdurexq o durexo soo1nos oougpedur MOT 8 9U se aq 508115 1011 speei INOA 1293014 PM BUNT 5 aq 03 810151891 591195 Jodoid jo YSNOIY SIUSISUBA BUTYOIMS SZTUNUI 74 Superoy paads ysry Suopoid jou 7 SP991 JO pue 124019 03 oq prnous seurpoprna Sumoo eur IrL Jutppoj JUANI pub sa4nsojo fo uouounj S1 2f pasy 5 uo vo 12 fo ISN adjsualxq ALON SJUQUISINSEAU 351 4 10 P9SIAPE SI spouueuo opeoop onp jo AiyIqedeo poads usn UONEAIISII Seipdde puooos spuuguo 0001 JO 9281 euru sp Aei aym suoprondde juoweinsvow psow 104 Op d L U99M19q JUSTPe13 o1njp1oduro pu
20. 1 R r 54 1 T DNS3 H DNS2 Hi DNSI tH ADDRESSED wC SAH S5 H luis 5218 i CLOCK CZ 22 2 A4 Part 03495 66504 Rev Figure 7 A 9 A4 Component Locator m lt lt 5 1 naa roa rm n rmm en b Q T Hj Sna YA Oi SIG Q3893HQQv 608 WNOILIONOO d Ma aN A mm HOI lo viv WINEN de 5 meer III mb le NE ZAMAN 3 NO NYAL manana I mut ANWVdNOO AB bL6 LHORAdOD IR 6355350067 TIN LY 1 woos o z e P Lees Mog y uan 2141 420109 0H1NOO TATI nay i NO FE Juas viva ent E VUE HP NO menn 4 A aS os o DON gm REDDERET ARDOR 8 4X7 777 lH RINT RATA 22
21. FOV dS AVE AWISY paisa JHL Hilde 098 018 064 OB uni Duiag 1 1831 uouAY 008 094 S34 EG GN iuouig4nsea A Y _ 052054 ON abuey UW OL 309125 OZL OL 28819 004 dois 069 LO3HHOONIL 094 059 018 ISOd 01 JOT HOMOSHA SSHOLIMS N3d0 5 0 Sjouugu 404 069 530008 8 137 MON L2 ndul 059 GILSIL ONI38 T3N NVHO LSHI4 3HL 30 3H L Si LVHA gt pue 0 008 NO SI HOLIMS NOLLISOd dO HOLIMS HOIHM UL eI NSHM LNOO SS3HdA HOLIMS NOIL 049 099 STINNVHO ONLLVNIHATI3 AT3AIS 029 009 OZ 089 078 O60r OSVv OL ep wes Did 359 4 peo Orr ic doch H3NNVOS NASH Ol ALAOSXS 33 AWIdSIO NO 5 LAZY NIHM iln2 3X3 QVOT 33934 55344 NddO MON TUM SAWISH 067 085 11819 4 98vrt 8 SAS GALNOHS 11115 INO 18981 LY i 08 ON j OIN Zi lt 096 05 buey
22. ul MWOLJ3NNOD 5747 e brad i E nnd 4 ee e 5 2 ie ey gt e 25 gt a 2 ui cessing A ELS mer enm Guns RAT M MOT MC 5550 NOWWOO 8 2 9 T3NNVHO 6 b T3NNVHO bOCHNNVHO CENNVEO VR eval AOT m m e TETTE a TTA m PUNO 93835 20301997 E O 4 869 8 56 2 91815 U peus snosuen x 3 ON C 2935001 4g EBI ou OPI pig E URAL shejoy PRI Ti 4 puz 91n98X3 S3A jene no 15 lt aeuz N 8890014 SAB NUINO sI L dog dip 9198 s v od Aou 09151 01 _passaippe puoesoid jou st JOUUBOS USAS 20818 18210 y TOC 1 Tesisatun 0 91 sp al peusis oy dofeaap uononisut 2 eui pue 205 19910 PAAS LEOL epoo 1181 pipeAu
23. 7 3 7 30 Operational Verification Check 9830A B uu ded aed ue he 7 3 1312 Description ua toe ros mos Ett s 7 3 7 36 Equipment Required 7 3 7 38 Operating 7 3 7 40 Definition of Program Variables 7 9 7 42 Program Modification 7 9 7 45 7 10 7 47 Operator Troubleshooting 7 10 7 50 Scanner Test Fixture Theory DE unserer 7 15 7 55 Operational Verification Check 9825 PICU 7 16 SOc DESC p UO vay a e led 7 16 7 61 Equipment Required 7 16 7 63 Operating Instructions 7 16 7 65 Definitions of Program Variables 7 18 POs etis 7 19 7 69 Troubleshooting 7 19 7 71 PC Board 7 25 7 74 Abbreviations and Schematic Symbols 7 26 SERVICE GROUPS A Theory and Service for Basic 3495 7 1 Theory and Service for Low Thermal Decades 7 B 1 C Theory and Service for Actuator Decades 7 1 D Theory and Information for Low Thermal DOG Decades wine pa Fux c xa 7 D 1 APPENDICES 3495A Programming Guide for the 9830A Calculator 3495 Programming Guide for the 9825A Calculator Model 3495 Figure m N m e hes
24. H j zm y Tes pm LISTEN ADDRESS DIO THRU ASCH CHARACTER 01 01001 NOTE SWITCHES SHOWN ARE CLOSED DATA BITS DE C MLA DIO7 THRU DIO IMAL 0110000 0110001 0110010 0110011 0110100 0110101 0110110 0110111 0111000 01116001 0111010 0111011 0111100 0111101 0111110 NS DOF VY N Q Section Model 3495 Source Operation Acceptor Operation 3495A SCANNER PI Set NRED amp NDAC Low Set DAV High Both NRED amp NDAC gt Sensed er se High e Abie to Handshake amp Respond to Data gt x H Accepted n YES Error TUN Condition 2 Ti amp TIO Put or Change Data on DIO Lines Ready To Accept Data Delay for Lines to Settie 8 7 SS Data is valid and may now be accepted Set DAV Low PEL caro ERE E T 14 Set NRFO Low Accept NO Data Byte A SION jin until 9 stays accept TE oo the dats OTS have 178116 la byte Set DAV High De Set NDAC High Has DAV Gone High Yet Set NDAC Low HP 18 B 4183 Figure 3 2 Handshake Sequence 3 6 Model 3495 3 42 THE HEWLETT PACKARD INTERFACE BUS 18 3 43 The 3495 Scanner receives commands and instruc
25. Ij f MEM a 1 i Nba md e aq Chee lt HEG a em se M Td q nidi imcda lt A lt TUR FREIEN retzgn mm ae M tron p lt 2 il nd 3 i ry men nl i DINASLUAG AI u 3 pos ti lt e g lt 8 A 9 as 3 Ag I 89 cepeo QeVOS 109 CSNNVMO OX Meter pnO A E M M TT A Pn ie AMMESSI zb en 2 3 SLIN A A AA MM S M e MM M M i i E anos 3 3 i i i PA De E no wen EMIESA temm i a AMA a EE 1 a cti re mo gt 0 Ketone LES nya 2 rek Ys A ARE YS nmin a MNA AUDE d Ter ubi 2 2 n UPRO SHO BOGE WASI TRNNYHD 92 AAA rr TIT Uere Section VH Model 3495 A Table 7 D 2 Replaceable Parts REFERENCE hp DESIGNATOR PART NO mj DESCRIPTION NES MFR PART NO LOW THERMA
26. i tee 44 ir de 444 e pt ENS C i if DU E A irr p un f m H P 4 y dd 22 err 1 bhe 44441 abe H j a F my 1 E EE or bae lie Jm de mw d re Lo e MENS Se del ee LT wes ari eph 2 sar 1448 ere ET m 449 del 4442 44 42944 a1 waged g que gags qd 444 for 1 i ream i P 1 i TL dero i des ee 144 an pe ho e cust f4 ing Be jays 442 4 t mar j t 4 e LI 1 der Wl gt E 4 na 3 Idee 1141 4144 4 HAY d 4 I p 4 deed u 1 dadas Ferro rh SD a AX the nnd rtr 1444 8 i bt ni h 4 qui 1 in sree th 42 4 amp 444 wu u Uh DIEN 5 Sun sh be m dae Ine of Su tt A failure in the retest will cause the program to print Fh bol 4444 29 bbb rrr pm 441 we H 4 CHRIS guess ka an 1 1 ero E m 4 i u i 1 mt ae Tr Ina ma 4124 du gt 4344 4284 am y D
27. x Figure 3 5 Physical View Voltage Scanning Option 001 Section O SIGNAL HIGH DECADE OR DUO DECADE Q SIGNAL LOW CLOSE ADDRESS 0 GUARD 349 3 COMMON INPUT LOW gt 2 INPUT HIGH 2 LON NON 8 2 GUARD COMMON 15148 LOW 4 gt y HIGH 4 gt i S er lOO GUARO 4 gt ae S DUO DECADE 2 CLOSE ADDRESS 2 DECADE OR HIGH COMMON N T524B 20 t OW COMMON Wad 7 8 e GUAR 100 GUARD COMMON 00 MR HIGH a 78248 5 3050 8 4545 gt Figure 3 6 Functional Diagram for Voltage Scanning Options 001 and 004 Model 3495A gt 2 43 2 3490 f 2 e 5 U d Close address Y T Close Address 2 49 1 HU go mem gre E gt TS23C 15230 TS23A B CHANNEL sj a CHANNEL O aos 20 GA qi 1 21 WA 2 22 M 3 23 o _ 4 24 o 7 27 8 28 gt i GUARDO 29 3080B 8 4008 Vy Vx Only channets 9 and 29 5 shown Figure 3 11 Physical View Voltage Scanning Actuator 3 15 3 16 oh LVE uondo Suruuros 985110 JO Wee euOTIOUNY 86 NVH2 eum 88 95554 82 NVHO 98251
28. AGS s ual sog ON Eveo WALL alnieub g uid yn sue SACO pue SAIS ON Apa MOG Uouda 19U E SARH Og ipo 9 4 t iz E H 35012 ROMO DA dno Hupooysajanos d Of 43582 5 5 he doig si uondo f DL puy 540129400 3981107 soi mBuliis 91 90000 Med Q000 6128 01 He 0006 4 6 164 6 Utd 0000 8064 OOG ENTE ud 0000 BEd G Utd GEE ld 99300 6 uld 0006 BNEd Utd BEG i Hig 33991410 SOA Zi A ZE sl x ON ON i UBIO SARH 2d S3A 5800 SUL BIADIDOLE ABS sagen soepdas 8 ID puy ZO 8202006 108 ACY WUD ldi 212815 edi 3201 4 dnour OWS 001 amp 003 CLEAR Instrument Test CLOSE 1 O U2 Signature 11978 FH9U 07HU POSU HAC U4 Signature 17PA C343 AF31 P898 71FF H565 0022
29. E LIT 4 EET DLE r m mp eo A ie Fis E Pe mt b gy ats E ies i He 1 A wl LX s Pug 1 4 t m a 5 P tipi E xe m 1 B 4 AI III Model 3495 Section Table 7 5 Controller Instructions and Operator Responses Cont d cH EES SS 3 insure that the 3 position switch is set before continu ing When the switches have been set the Operator is asked to continue the program from the display Press CONTINUE when ready When the program has been continued the controlier displays the following messages requesting the first and last channel to be tested First CHANNEL to be TESTED Last CHANNEL to be TESTED The operator must input a channel number between 0 and 319 then press execute after each mes sage NOTE ff the inputs are in the specified numerical range or if the first channel number is larger than the last channel number the display will be INCORRECT INPUT and the controller will repeat the message Valid inputs will allow a printout of the test Channels under test as shown below number and 7 22 3 i j 2 1 i ed 1 1 sra 3 D iom E gt Leo 1 pue m I be SU anat sib u a
30. Vau c 241 c gt feu dd ID s a 02 gm 219 me O 6 le 944 oJnjiBuDIS jan WONT LX Linsey ct ENT gy 2 3 1 AION RAHIT LLJTASA 4465 LHDIHADOS EG a Uh A wo i A 77 i ba ind SINUM ae pe A ES Tm rs AAA TAE de he EA I IAS Y pes RISO 4 105 icc CS DAPRAS AU RS 45 re i i REPE UNSER Ti VIVO LNIWNULSNI LOTES I3NNVHO a nei zi M TuS mom rs ft Shas wha EV i RE nn nun en M M MM fa aaa M TUNA i NIA 2 A 35984544 i TOE a Model 3495 A Appendix APPENDIX A 1 INTRODUCTION Packard Model 3495 A Scanner It serves as a basic program ming guide which you can refer to when developing 9830A A 2 This information is provided as a general summary of programs for the 3495 Scanner 9830A Calculator programming techniques for the Hewlett 3495A PROGRA
31. LNOLLVUNDISNOD 1531508 VIVO di dH LVS 7998 VELL 3296 2440 VERY 974 747 VVOH LOVH vico sinzeudlg 21189 jinos3Xx3 192135 J3NNVHO 122135 NO NOS st 4 OOH 070 IQF al 9Vt8 Lt PLYS 9i Gi HOv6 i 939 sand 8844 BAN EUBis OLNSV DLV EL G ASSL WON Svs 8 9 3 S3N 103735 HHAJO SO 1531 441 OB INOS 1x3 LEI NO SSNIt I ONISS3HGOGVY ern ONY VIVO RANI SEN IAVHSON VA ALINY ENEE Si dH 2 ANIMOS auneusis 4038201 3ueuodulo gy 9 3 einDii cingv vin vt 92 ones ac l 9628 ES 8810 ez 22 92 ZEN Y dH p 77772 644 LC Led gin EU m L8HS E pgs yes dvdv m Vein Si E ee 9598 gi Ej 2902 fe DHEd E ual gm an x 6918 i ni pam SE 9318 et d 5 dn 9 1 9 m ens v cH gzu T9507 en 9n 21 gt CHI pdi EE al 0910 i dine Esc UR Fra idi a f ui pem 048 an e en an in ee jeudis 73 e CLOBV 7
32. OUTPUT 13 WBYTE 512 WBYTE instruction WBYTE instruction COMPUTED INSTRUCTIONS FORMAT B 2F3 0 OUTPUT 13 10 512 channel channel COMPUTED CHANNELS 11 Literal instructions 12 The instruction term is a literal string of instruc tions The CMD statement may be used to alternately select the Command and Data modes any number of times needed limited only by line length however it always leaves the HP IB in the Data mode If it is not wanted to send commands the Command mode may be effectively skipped by using an empty quote field as shown The 512 term gives the HP IB Data mode it may be omitted unless the HP IB has been left in the Command mode by a previously executed 265 term under the binary format A statement may be substituted for the 512 term Instruction E is not required at the end of the FORMAT or OUTPUT instructions string because CR LF are automatically sent as the last characters Table 5 instructions INSTRUCTION ASCII CHARACTER DECIMAL Digit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 48 thru 57 Space SP Clear C Execute Carriage Return CR E External increment Off External increment First Channel Last Channel Software increment No Operator Delimiter NUL DEL Any other character 1 thru 126 With preceding exceptions A 13 Computed Instructions 14 The WBYTE
33. aanpeubss din O NM vot O Et EAN DE IS eee E es OCW REN HOLEN ef SPAS 3NIHOVW 31415 AW TAY H34SNVHi AYIASIO SNIL H3dSNVMI 01 SHAG AV SIG iov OL MOMINOO AV DH o de Hand 6054 0000 HGHA FNSE SUI dE STETS 6753 0980 Er tee C 245 HS o ria int File 6753 00690 11 00 4 en 9664 0927 6 evvv 0096 NALO 71062 HGHG POV Hwd 9316 9833 2508 LENG dHOw aunieuiig OGL LCdt 868d 3341 089 cn TOS LNOI AW SIG Avid BNEd 0000 Gi 0006 6n 4 vi 166 9712 L 9H 9 81 n HPOO 6n d LL GREAT a 0000 Of 653 6000 0000 6n1 d 9 206 pSr LOHE Y 0000 6ntd E NEG 0000 c s nleu ts 9n OHEd 01 2200 24n32Uubis an 3 a LOYH bl nHZ 8 8261 G n6H3 34nieuBis uld vn paly 032 ulg en palt El paip Gi 3 8 2000 91118061 5 2018 OZY 74 2 e1nBi4 E SIND 310 3X3 KER i 5309230 jet SS38QQV 399930 193138 309230 33015 S N31 59370 SLING 5 SLING j 5 TIUS
34. i er Bet Lape j E 3 Qj i i t P Jus 44 4 as de 7 1 i s 1 EA ur Vul toa sala ness bl 1 MIEL 1 4 As Ins gassa 1 ii 1 bu 1 rt f set or rre P ng gasar a T 1 8 60 4 urs 4 mm dk lig 1 i 5a 4 i ih 4 pU Ina que emma qon e un qu pen tr po ree yr I 4 4 e Pro 422 mr Pe pole m de f ben ie toy abe Fu Janu he 1 81 ut i1 id TT 3f firs rhe rhe a4 2 04 5 banos 5 hue t het t uu gara gost pacer mo 44 lt lt Ib 4544 gt 43444 m 424 444 m P Fr PU FU atia pU Pug s pet i e Eu NU Pu LE 1 HE 1 rr t 13554 114 y E yr A m iis iof Kr pe ji nm iii 4 m a py a feed 1 t i r 4 3 ge isu o Au Yee fo tae d i 5 otn due e 144 I fon hn ant rdi 4 sor 1 1 de ud H FEE 9 a pe pure eel quas dequo r M
35. per hour 5 C hour 1 24 SUPPLEMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS 1 25 Supplemental characteristics are intended to provide information useful in applying the 3495A and interpreting specifications These include typical performance meters Table 1 2 lists supplemental characteristics for the hp Model 3495A Scanner Table 1 2 Supplementa Characteristics Environmental Requirements Storage Temperature a0 C to 375 C u Operating Temperature O to 55 C lt 95 RH at 40 Power 100 120 220 240 volts 5 1096 48 to 66 Hz line lt 100 VA Dimensions 190 5 mm 7 5 in high 428 6 mm 16 88 in wide 520 7 mm 20 5 in deep MESSAGE TRANSFER RATES Weight Depends on options Temperature Gradient along terminais from thermistor Option 003 Option 005 Static Dynamic Reference Thermistor Accuracy lt 0 2 C Applies to ambient temperature 1 deviations Applies to ambient temperature step of 5 C or C hour maximum rate of change Message Typical Handshake Times usec Byte Commands Selected Device Clear SDC Group Execute Trigger Device Clear DCL My Listen Address MLA Uniisten Address UNL instructions Digits OGIO 01 HON mm O Space SP Ciear Execute CR External Increment Off On First Channel Last Channel Software Increment No Operator NUL DEL Nor TF mo Delimiter Others Act as delimiters AB
36. 4 2 ua ad rie ds 2 5 4 2 Switching Time Test 4 3 Some Decade Address Possibilities 3 4 4 3 Sample 9825 Switching Time Test 4 4 HP IB Handshake 5 3 6 4 4 Thermal Offset Voltage Setup 4 5 3495A Scanner Programming Model 3 9 4 5 Channel Isolation Test Wiring Diagrams 4 5 Basic Volts Multiplex Scanning 3 13 4 6 Channel Isolation Test 4 6 Physical View Voltage Scanning 3 13 4 7 Capacitance Test Wiring Diagrams 4 7 Functional Diagram for Voltage Scanning 3 14 4 8 Capacitance Test 4 8 Physical View 2 Wire Ohms Scanning 3 15 3 16 4 9 Frequency Response Test Wiring Diagrams 4 9 Functional Diagram for 2 Wire Ohms 4 10 Frequency Response Test Setup 4 10 Scanning ioco ne Soa b ee 3 15 3 16 5 1 Five Volt Adjustment 5 1 5 2 Physical View 4 Wire Ohms Scanning 3 15 3 16 7 1 3495 Scanner Test Flowchart 7 11 7 12 Functional Diagram for 4 Wire Ohms 7 2 3495 Scanning Troubleshooting Test d 3 15 3 16 Flowchart 7 13 7 14 Physical View Voltage Scanning 3 15 3 16 7 3 Scanner Test 7 16 Functional Diagram of Voltage 74 Scanner Verification Program Wiring 7 17 3 1
37. BEST CONNECTION GUARD AND LOW SAME VOLTAGE NO COMMON MODE CURRENT GOES THROUGH Rp cm SOURCE GROUND INSTRUMENT GROUND PA M S CAPPED OREMUS B GUARD CONNECTED TO LOW AT SCANNER FLOATING SOURCE OR THERMOCOUPLE 3495A _ GUARD AND LOW AT SAME VOLTAGE COMMON MODE CURRENT GOES THROUGH Rp CAUSING SLIGHT ERRORS 1 CONNECTION E CHANNELS TO BE GUARDED UARD iem SOURCE GROUND 4 INSTRUMENT GROUND C GUARD COMMON TO LOW COMMON BR MEE SOURCE 3495A THERMOCOU 0 em T 0 5 56 IN Rb Low S en ncm REO E 5 OPTION CHANNELS EFFECTIVELY GUARDS DVM RR COMMON MODE CURRENT GOES THROUGH Rp AND Rr CAUSING ERRORS Ecm SOURCE GROUND INSTRUMENT GROUND ____ Figure 3 18 Connecting the Guard Model 3495 Section EXT INCR CARR 4 BELAY CHIT ha MODEL 8254 CALCULATOR WJ GENERAL YO ROM SCANNER SCA W EXTENDEO ROM hp 34954 WJOPTION 004 WOPTION 109 COMMON LEADS MEASUREMENT LEADS Figure 3 19 Burst Measurement System b The amount of ac current that can be safely inter d As channel reeds approach the end of their life the rupted is approximately 1 to 2 times the amount of de high to low contact resistance shorted inputs begins to current that can be safely interrupted assuming equiva vary a Standard deviation
38. E MOT guvno MO WNOIS Y IUNOIS Y T a 2 HOlVhlOV AL SS3H00v 35010 399934 1 12 SS3YUOOV 3 Figure 3 e c A Signal Low inper High input Low Guard al d ri Digte 53918655 Figure 3 7 Physical View 2 Wire Ohms Scanning Option 001 SHIELD HIGH LOW GUARD INPUT HIGH mm HOLT LOW SW OZOMMO Feige SUARG SOM On m reece 3052 4 4545 8 Functional Diagram for 2 Wire Ohms Scanning Options 001 and 004 E 4 2 28 T 2 5 8 9 5 amp b e S use address 4 Close address 0 s n cina TON RAS amp qwe p USED 2 HIE GMT m 1 wE M lon MSH o dis J a era 8 ape nde 4 3 ex Low 2 ez ie 4 gt LOS 4 5 3030 405 Tun Figure 3 9 Physical View 4 Wire Ohms Scanning Option 001 RGM h LO u nee DECADE OR DO DECADE AGREE 2 3 GU RO 34904 NEU COMMON 6 09 gp een E
39. FROM Eds DECADES DECADE 274 QUALIFIER EG CLEAR ADDRESS a st QUALIFIER MACHINE cli EXECUTE 14934 b 3979 DECADE THSABLE Figure 7 8 7 A10 Block Diagram 5495A B Z58 7 HiGH LOW RELAY FULL RELAY VOLTAGE iGUARD RELAY CLOSE GUARD TENS CELT 01 MOT REL emp AREA x n a PEN 2522 ANMdNIO OHO LLAMA IHOUAgOO B NO 1 EEo PPP 1 1 i i EE S30v030 Base run SI dH 83207345 ON 7193415 eos AAW en Pn Sawer tene tam t MIA Waals Lan i ver i E dM 1 74 1 t HYH 30V230 ee i 5 NSAR 307230 4 Ll Me R IREK i iu Fey BALL 307036 05550 1 H 1 PAL i mt T 304939 awe ain 394520 poe eet 307730 coo gt gazz 309938 307930 4 mM F o ce 2
40. Ong FPL ON 10143 i 20415 95 petse OL HUNNYAD 151 t 83 26114 Ep DEY 9 dU RO IPMS 10134 95 Fi OL 13MNYEZ Paves LULPDIOS 55 04 JO E V E 342 22 dur 12447140 SOS 10 df uns 8334 OY Gene 50934 18 en 323 top eur AUTORES 95 sod ip BE GING BOLO SQ823H 19 1607 fd bear SoA 5 5 dig HOURS FOS amu 9E Di J HYD Eb 29120405 152 151 144055 Er SAA ans SUATIOAGAS 10414 254 rang 2881 30 dna En WHEE WHOS 28340 Us PUB AE PEAS 030 ERS 150 Jig tr BOLE v wawo 23892 goa E n euntis AMEL ot FAURE PRS Model 3495 7 71 PC BOARD CLEANING 7 72 Some 3495A printed circuit boards require clean handling techniques to preserve their high impedance characteristics Service proce
41. dads nu que 11 tbe EST 1d Tt thot T 1 i ope MU De zum 4 44 pn spe pes 1 Aet ur d 1 Hees LT u When a reed test is completed the program will ask if the Operator wishes to continue by displaying ARE MORE CHANNELS TO BE TESTED if the operator responds with a EXECUTE the program will ask which reed test is desired An input of 1 2 or 3 would start the test sequence again see Step a A response END OF TESTING would generate a printout indicating the successfulness of the Testing a display of END OF TEST See the examples below faulty relayfs if may be replaced following the relay replacement procedure n Appendix A of this Manual A response of 1 EXECUTE YES wili cause the program to ask for a FIRST and LAST channel number see Step OR if all of the switches have been opened and the reading from the Scanner still indicates a resistance reading of less than 12 MQ the problem is not in the relays themselves but in some other portion of the 3495A Scanner or in the 3490A Multimeter The program will print the following display for this case ee Xe INR aig ek bue VUE Mud Eus mem po pr qus PH pu vesc get 1 hs t hu jad 5 lii 3 jes bs frat PF j ic fia hg 1 H 1 1 St
42. i m ath A un a e ser PT SP y 1 4 4 th 1 j n 4 i i i des t 1 42 1 A 441 j r 4 3 1 1 rt fee 4 hat 441 4 da dar 434 she kn 303 0 L 4 rer s Operator should respond with the switch position 1 2 or 3 EXECUTE of 3 position switch This allows the program to identify the specific reed test that originated the failure 4 The program will then ask for the first channel number being tested This identifies the specific decade assembly under test The printout is shown below 1 144 4292 440244 zb phg pes qa m un bald 142 144 444 er AMO 1 4444 6 44444 drre aghi genee dae spet np bere UEM Ll UIN 1 4 117 3 li CA 1 tot t vl ee E f 1 MN 144 n J fmf dem n i i m d 4 4 er i j f pr o E 11 t 1 ne 4 4 4 4 LN 4l 444 4 14444 4 umm 444 EE 13 Ies de rhe kpas 11299 444 2322 um etr sane n i o 144 t 4 4 bla ch 1 4 et gd L NOTE The channel numbers are preset at the factory Beginning at the far right as you
43. mames TF Hi pe The program will wait until the operator has finished reading the instruction The display will hold PRESS CONTINUE when ready The operator can then press and the program will retest the Scanner Channels and display TEST in progress and print see if that solved the prslems h the Rerest fais the controller will print additional instructions for the troubleshooting program operation as shown below The controller will display At least one relay still shorted then Instructions gt and print b a the Bt oy jd wm En ME ELO LI tr lived ba A 1 LE 7 t 1 r ish FELT pr Qv a 1 T 1 14 rJ m F rU E ES mm re dlc za Filc m m ihe program will wait for the Operator to accomplish the in struction by stopping and displaying PRESS CONTINUE when ready The program will check each channel in succession until the bad reiay is found When a bad relay is found the controller will print Channel number is the variable 7 21 Section Vil Model 34954 Table 7 5 Controller instructions and Operator Responses Cont d de pus d in d i an wh LI 74 E 1i PO GU Ti pee 1 4 n omo grat
44. podus 4 h 4 m arri 14 fe po i j 40 har 1 1 Rr er Printout of Error Messages w 40 s 11 4 4 Mp ose N dem 4 quei Pro queso Ma ganze 7 1 4 1 bf d 4 EN t LAE ijo T pado 4 2 pel ls idi re i apt Epee u j my i r ju fer i e de ihe bp m f m lis 4 mr ih x 1 1 agaa 4 4 i de r 3 re UTE m m j 4 L5 12 fases 1 T dudes 1 jp Is f ema m Ti pei vp pens th ite P t 1 pe SU Poo gere rt 2444 Jus 13 ge pe pe ul fex i e fea qu inti 7 1 i Ba e a ie aet Jaga Juas t i DOE f abe Pace qe fata 144 E ej 444 ag 3 Se han hes Teast Basen Seer 1 Ad BC fen E 1 fina err aa 5 de Inr 4544 1 am 4 zus UI 944 Ma er Ha phass pt h 244 i Yo UA n der a 22 sbel m p i E 3 SU E 421 PU F 30011 1 1 i J t 1 1 1 f n mi ju 1 j ays je 4 44 Erro 4244 w frei
45. 1269 9 doi E eea 0000000000000008080900 MNPRSTUVWXY 2 A2 hp Part No 03495 66524 Figure 7 A 2 A2 Component Locator SERVICE GROUP 4 THEORY OF OPERATION 7 11 GENERAL 7 A 12 The A4 Interface and Control assembly interprets commands and instructions on the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP IB and controls the channel accordingly Com mands are sent on the HP 1B during the Command mode line low channel pro gramming instructions are sent during the Data mode ATN line high Six signals pass the commands and instructions to the decade assemblies Low Thermal Logic decade assem blies Options 001 and 003 close the three relay contacts of one channel per decade in a break before make sequence Actuator Logic decade assemblies close the two relay contacts of any number of channels per decade simultaneously Flags are sent to the Interface and Control assembly from the Logic assemblies to hold up the reception of data from the HP IB while the Logic assemblies are opening or closing relays A block diagram of the basic 3495A Scanner is shown in 7 1 A block diagram of the A4 interface and control assembly is shown in Figure 7 A 4 7 13 Channel Closure 7 14 channel is closed by the following sequence of operations a The iit channel digit is 4 b The units channel digit is stored on A4 c Decade Select signal stores the unit s digit and ten s display di
46. 651 15 39vHO1S AVIASIO SN31 HDA S LINN vv Oi ov ONISOTS 4038907 Qz V 70 2 Y 02999 96680 ON Hbg dy o Z R mereen Sin pin E lj o CII 2 E d 7 ES 7 UN a 7 i j jun oin en H 2 9i 4 d sal on R ot Li d zn 5 n3 A en an in 31 gt 3 1 Ud o gt e Section Vil Model 3495 7 6 20 ACTUATOR RELAY REPLACEMENT Repeat Steps 1 4 of the High Low Relay replacement procedure located in Service Group to da cess to the Actuator relay board gain ac Unscrew the two screws on each side of the relay board assembly and remove the top cover a ication chart shown in f i Select the correct relay to be removed from the ident Figure 7 9 3 E CS AMANTI 35 I NA S 5 RR 5252 22274527 UD RE EA UL MATE Dun pm EEE 22 EG 41227222324 251 A
47. BRO i d 3 1 egs E one ml vox wei id gt 1 8eisi ee Gy0 HI 2442 essa SE E e El S KB VEISi jojB20 Gy 761 8 anb SOG99 G6PEO ON 1104 du gv SIGE 8 956 o AO 27 PM nun 27 8 hd PEA ov uSnong ejdsrq jeuueqo qeuueup mot p amig 5 4 x e 1 E LPS SODED ON Meg _ 079 9650 ON viv HOLSHAHSHL amp Led LR A i dios SPEO DNISN3S xa ait zu 91 H 6 er Gum GEM M von 9 27 T SYN NOWAOG pes Me p HOD i gt 3 Ea 1 GENS 2 dno er i 9 HDI 1 guvno i 2 e devas e 2 lt Lineci s HEIR 4 j M 181 moi i e my 3 AW SIG uu m S E 1 G wo i SLINA t ASIC nn i 2
48. E Et Pm 42442 FS p it hii Lis mm 2 ro oh p u pop e T pet cit par e E ms gs EP Lie mncanner poi a t 4 Ths a 4 t T 1 I 5 an ES r 1 t 1 111 1 i EM ias CONTENTI t PEG i mu 3 1 4 r t 4 t 1 t wrrr m if the program does not find a bad relay then it will print ou 4 s h 7 Di oi H u j H H 5 EX FT ee BR ib o1 31 toc 1 Her Im fae SU AU E 1 34 ERE Ps 4 111 e i t wed a 4 a qe 1 111 41 qu Te Vou r ok EE em T i 1 ee gd 4 410 1 m rU in I 4e PY i br i 1 4 3 1 be t 1 i mu The operator should refer to the Scanner Troubleshooting par graphs before proceeding i A successful retest will cause the program to branch back to the first of the program rerun the test to insure that the relays under test are not shorted and then continue with any remaining REED tests The printout of the instructions is shown below UTEM 4 E i4 3 RU ot pots em np f n
49. EXE 5 1 AOS we ROH ANRA A a NOT 4 4 1 4 L4 H i N fH LON e 0 Ic er union 1 3G0930 90599 S AGES Ads AOT Tube i AMOO LESS LHSHAdOD lc d MEM O A i ee yon INH AYTAN eee ee E 4 2 1 t 1 AYER E Lic gt ol in N3ASS ge 7 y im 14 xs Ava MSN AED 0 i u ad E 1 1 Lm Ar ay Avus 3 Sau 1 BNO i pem Pe 0532 8980 E 6230 i i ANIN SNE AMOS LEDS MBAS NRAZS RIS XIS BAS 33811 T QA d Guaz i AYTAN AY Ava AY34 ATIS f Ay 138 EIS AY 188 AY 135 IJH xy 128i NE Ay I3 N yon GUYO mo
50. H rr e Bun dies re 1n 4 han i 3 1 E rr a er asr er NES H i a NC m 24744 7 grit E und Hi j j b i H pl a y 14 agu amp 4 na m an I an pie pon are are Man eee doom qt pites tee abot Mi a ial Y 4 S Dii PN P ip P ima he E t 1 pn r P p 154 ten Pap t tr M BS pu t ne ui MN i je epr geer pi 144 a TM ny s han de d ons i ba os Eh bar ben E 1 31 4444 be ob trabe 5 jon un 4 dan j sen Jens qn qaaa 1 257 4 pee g s es pis 11 me 14224 y I H f que 10921 perse pn pee H0 Anar ope t 133 1 1 iit t 14 ir 3 4 BK t 11 1 D lo nt Lt oe 7 E E iq pe i feit Bee dii ie PP Be ij i pe I ase Ie ere wa jm i EE fle 3 3 344 3 4 5o ode 1 o8 tut b e Liiva 1 nr 1 LG ust ien ain gt fe UC dun em tas 4044 nd d due mudo S An Kurt m 1 PU Haa pras abel AT sas ganes go press 5 st ie yr SHM
51. Scanner Must Be Listening The HP 1B Must Be In The Command Mode To Address The Scanner B I Appendix Table B 3 9825A Command Statements Command Statements cir trg cir Key Corresponding to MLA in fable 3 1 UNL tions The CMD statement always leaves the in the Data mode The empty quote field effectively skips the Command mode An E instruction is required at the end of the literal string in the CMD statement to execute the instructions The WRT statement automatically sends a Carriage Return 8 11 Computed Instructions B 12 The last two digits of the select code may be omitted if the scanner is already addressed to listen The 7 is neces sary as described before The instruction term must an expression equal to the decimal value of the appropriate instruction in Table 5 8 13 Computed Channels B 14 The last two digits of the select code may be omit ted if the scanner is already addressed to listen The channel term must be an expression equal to one channel number 0 to 79 The format specification is necessary This method automatically sends Carriage Return and Line Feed characters 15 A decade of channels may be opened by sending the ten s channel digit under an 82 0 format followed by an execute instruction The digit 8 clears decade 0 and the digit 9 clears decade 1 B 16 Examples B 17 Each of the following examples closes channel 36 if
52. Ta E RAEN electrolytic co megohmis 1076 ohms polystyrene SAGAR ea encapsulated met FM meta film DO A ado riada ra wattisi TTE ER E manufacturer E beeen piakc dtopask with E Sa eh nr NEN RE REN AR MES os a millisecond POM parts per million WV Working inverse valtage PEE Ue ase field effect transistor mounting PER precision temperature W O without 2 fixed MY millivoltis 1077 volts long term stability and or tolerance WW wirewound IP Yu microfarad s CIA Louie op rac ife gatlium arsenide microsecondis resistor GHA darias gigahertz 1079 hertz microvoltis 106 volts RR ee ras rhodium ele eh a apdtedi TW ic sacks ieee Mylar R PIE root mean square 2 optimum value selected at factory GE AN germanium rotary average value shown part may be omitted groundled nanoamperels 10 9 amperes standard type number assigned MO er er normally closed S8 aeg selenium selected spectal NE oco use
53. a Connect the test setup as shown in Figure 4 8 Allow the RLC meter 1 hour warmup time before proceeding b Before connecting the test leads twisted pair and guard to the scanner connector set the R LC METER as follows and then zero the meter FUNCTION 5 A Aa C G RANG Beenie d eA A AUTO HIGH A vasi FULLY CLOCKWISE Max Zeroing the meter eliminates the effects of the inherent test lead capacitance A B TERMINALS TERA NALS Ben TWISTED PAIR 23 OPTION 002 SHOWN FOR CHANNEL 9 CAPACITANCE MEASUREMENT rT Figure 4 7 Capacitance Test Wiring Diagrams 4 7 Section Connect the twisted pair to high common and low common on the connector or to and of the Option 002 channel you wish to test Connect the test lead terminal shield to guard common on the connector d Install the connector into the SCANNER e Increment the scanner to the channel you wish to test The worst case channels are listed below and on the Performance Test Card 3 184 4 9 0 9 1 8 Option 004 Tb Is 4 Since the channel capacitances are physically determined measurements on these channels should be conclusive f Record the measured capacitance on the performance test card at the rear of this section g Repeat Steps e and f for all channels to be tested In
54. address characters 7 33 INSTRUMENT ADDRESS BLOCK 7 34 Comparator U18 and gate U19B monitor the data bits DS1 through 087 contin uously during the HP IB Command mode ATNS at U19B to detect the 3495A s ASCII Listen address character 019 monitors bits 056 and DS7 for the code 01 which defines the group of ASCH characters of Table 7 2 U18 compares bits DSi through 055 with the logical levels of the Listen Address jumpers and gives the Address Enable signal when the two codes become identical this defines a character within Table 3 1 in Section III Operating Instructions 7 35 The Listen Address signal gives the Addressed signal when U20B flip flop is clocked at pin 3 A feedback via gates U3B and U3C holds the flip flop output at the same level until the Unlisten signal or Unaddress signal occurs Unlisten signal occurs when the data bits DS1 through 087 coincide with the ASCII code for 497 and the HP IB is in the Command mode ATNS true Unaddress occurs when the HP IB IFC line is made low true or when the instrument is turned on 7 36 CONTROL STATE MACHINE BLOCK 7 37 The Control State Machine is the heart of the 34954 It regulates the reception of ASCH characters from the HP IB and controls the relay decades according to the characters The Not State 30 20 10 signal controls the NRFD signal in the Handshake circuit and the state number bits 51 through 55 control the decade Logic assemblies Figure
55. hp 1251 2277 a Connect the test setup as shown in Figure 4 10 Do not wire the connector at this time b Set the Test Oscillator controls as follows RANGE eins UE es X1K 10 kHz WERNIER lt a 10 7 Frequency OUTPUT ATTENUATOR 3 0 volts La Le Hp He 9 Q 160324 TEST LEADS 9 SHIELD Figure 4 8 Capacitance Test Setup 4 8 Model 3495 TO DMM HIGH 0 wwe HIGH COM LOW ds Tm HIGH o nenn S GUARD COM LOW HIGH 2 LOW GUARD Y HIGH 4 abro OW 3 GUARD 2 HIGH 4 4 GUARD 3 EE GUARD 4 FROM TEST OSCILLATOR A14 OPTION 001 CHANNEL 4 MEASUREMENT SHOWN FROM OSCILLATOR Section IV TERMINALS TEAMENALS CHANNEL FROM t 1 TET OSCILLATOR 23 OPTION 002 CHANNEL 9 MEASUREMENT SHOWN OPTION 004 CHANNEL MEASUREMENT SHOWN Figure 4 9 Frequency Response Test Wiring Diagrams c Set the DMM controls as follows RANGE 22 AUTO for auto ranging DMM s FUNCTION e rA COUR d nets ACV TRIGGER siue d ox INTERNAL AUTOCAD rca UR ON GUARDO aaa ar DEPRESSED Guard to Low Connection d Connect the Test Oscillator 50 ohm output to the DMM via 50 ohm feedthrough termination hp 1 1048C e Adjust the test oscillator output to DMM reading of 3 0000 volts f Wir
56. ii Yi CONLOFLS Model 5495 TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont d Section Page 42 Speclicatiolis 4 4 mos toe oe dee eevee es 4 4 4 27 Test Procedure 3 4 644044400400 24 4 5 4 28 Capacitance 4 6 du 5 dde dor woke 4 6 4S0 o RR RAS CR ER 4 7 4 32 TEST Procedures susc be DUE WS 4 7 4 33 Frequency Response 4 8 4 34 Specifications 4 8 435 o COR OCC 4 8 431 TESORO oe dee 4 8 4 38 Automating the Test Process 4 10 Section Page Ye MENT Sec 5 1 5 2 5 1 Power Supply Adjustment 5 1 5 2 Section Page Vi REPLACEABLE ASSEMBIIES 6 1 5 6 1 6 3 Replaceable Parts 6 1 6 5 Ordering Information 6 1 6 7 Non Listed Parts isaac 6 1 Section Page 10 9 NN 7 1 7 1 The Service Group 7 1 Je DU oe aos Eos 7 1 7 6 Recommended Service Equipment 7 1 7 8 Preliminary Troubleshooting 7 2 7 10 Troubleshooting Trees 7 2 7 12 Access for Servicing de 7 2 7 16 Overall Troubleshooting 7 2 7 19 Troubleshooting 65 7 2 7 20 SOIVICE KT cus ctc ds 7 2 am hw Lo Section Page 7 22 delay Replacement 7 2 7 25 Signature Analysis 7 3 7 28 Test Kit Options 001 003
57. tions h Increment four times This can be accomplished by either 1 Sending four step S instructions 2 Sending the external increment on 11 instruction followed by applying four increment pulses 3 61 Notice that the algorithm does not say HOW to perform each step just WHAT steps are needed To actually perform each step of a Scanner algorithm a thorough knowledge of the Scanner s programming mode is needed 3 62 PROGRAMMING MODEL FOR THE 3495 SCANNER 3 63 The way the Scanner performs the steps of an algorithm is determined by the Scanner s set of commands and instructions data Commands are sent to the Scanner when the HP IB is in the Command mode LOW Instructions are sent to the Scanner when the HP IB is in the Data mode ATN HIGH The Scanner does not use the EOL SRO REN and DIOS lines of the 3 64 In the Command mode the 3495 can be addressed to Listen addressed to unlisten cleared or triggered to execute previous data mode instructions Table 3 4 lists the set of 3495A commands in the command mode Table 3 4 Commands Command Selected Device Clear SDC Device Clear DCL Listen Address MLA Unlisten Address UNL 3 8 ASCI DIO7 DIO1 000010 Group Execute Trigger 0001000 4 Table 3 1 Table 3 1 The Must Be In UM i The Command Mode To 7 BS Address The Scanner Decimal Co
58. utd 481043107 Puy euo Anedoidg BuneiedO WEBrE au Oj UD JIL 103 2947 quo sr lt 2 4 0 GF US ui 00 100 suona sassatopy ify 195 uoHdO AN TOONS 00 ubinoau 100 PAaL sg LONGO 385 22841907 AINERUHG sE eedah puy UHAICLNSEEOT 1553 NOUS BN ed YOA 99847 idi 34616 soi SYS 848Ai4 aedy 528123 UOHMS GEG 602 Hey ON E Lim 42010 PUY Sfi LA SBA egt 3 BIRI SNOT ein 5ainiBub G 51 ON 6 987 G uid Ein st 3 ON SOL DIMAS 241 1935 dire ase VS Es D tdi 534 4 1981100 any 15 ON OVID Zi Vid Gi Ute vana Eb aid ON Cd ERE Hd 383 ayan 2 914 Eres ENEY 00130007 LF 3847 LOO ubnosu i UIHME dois LS Zdi E ASA PID ee ee ee PUY SEN 4294
59. 0497086 084 1531 40 ONB GLE 04809 2907 WAC 329125 008 06 4g 095 158 paje 4 ON 922 531 8355 4 peiutig enr 386 REP NIHM LMOO 553340 Wiig OLLE OGLE 0127 0686 6200226 082 WAS 509 0 MS TIY ASOD OLE 095 0 5 HadOde 5013 DL SNOIIODULSNIs 090 0 8 089 GAYN De 40 SGV3b 9 HOH lt SOSH Vi MOL Hitt 099 059 099 094 0Lb 09p SIBUURYD 182125 Ort 334 paid ami DEE paysiuiy SBA Bbt G SaAE 22 101 LIA H HOON ir 3984102 08 OGLE nap 352 indui Lt 2 031 057 1531 sugli anasu buneladO id oc 170b pue 2 moui WAG ede pct DE 3495 Section Table 7 4 T List of 3495A 9330A Cassette Start End File File Words Words Line Line No Type File Used Number un yee the source of the problem Often it is an incorrect address which can be corrected and the Verification Check rerun There may be problems with the Cables Instrument or the Card Refer to Step b if the suspected pro
60. 1 0351 9772 1 0233 2660 1 0351 9660 1 0351 9772 1 0233 9440 1 0593 39440 1 0593 9772 1 0233 9440 1 0593 9440 1 0593 9772 1 0233 NOTE Bold values can be used as an abbreviated test k Connect the test oscillator 50 ohm output to the DMM via a 50 ohm feedthrough termination disconnect from Scanner 1 Adjust the test oscillator output for a DMM reading of 3 0000 volts Reconnect the test oscillator to the scanner as shown in Figure 4 10 n Record the DMM reading V on the Performance Test Card at the end of this section o Verify that the ration V VREF is within the limits shown in Table 4 2 NOTE It is necessary to adjust the Test Oscillator back to 3 0000 volts after each change of frequency This occurs twice per channel measurement p Repeat Steps b through o for each channel to be tested adjusting the test oscillator frequency in Step J to the values listed in Table 4 2 4 38 AUTOMATING THE TEST PROCESS 4 39 Because of the repetitive nature of testing scanner channel performance the test process is easily automated An HP IB test system can be developed around equipment such as that listed in Table 4 3 Such a system reduces the quantity of wiring and measurement recording which was necessary in the manual procedures although requiring somewhat more elaborate equipment Table 4 3 Suggested Test System Equipment Calculator Readi
61. 1 t Don UJ be Lu Ya n da do 47 I 3 8 3 9 3 10 Table of Contents LIST OF TABLES Page Table Page SDECIICAUOUS TEES E SEA 1 2 7 4 List of 3495A 9830A Cassette 7 15 Supplemental CharacteristicS 1 5 7 5 Controller Instructions and service Group Descriptions 1 7 Operator Responses x uu qe 7 20 Support 1 9 1 10 To SADDIPEVIAUODS ico ate SEC Soe 7 26 Factory Installation of Options 2 3 7 1 Replaceable Parts Power Supply Al A2 My Listen Addresses 3 5 AS AMA idol re 7 3 Signals 3495A 5 3 7 7 2 Data Next State Code at 4 7 A 10 3495A Scanner Bus Capabilities 3 7 7 A 3 Replaceable Parts Interface and cowie 3 8 Control A3 4 7 7 15 BSOS a er ARS 3 9 7 B 1 Replaceable Parts A10 Low Thermal Implementing the Algorithm Example 3 12 LOC one 7 7 7 8 SOURCES ace ow 3 22 7 2 Replaceable Parts Low Thermal Recommended Test Equipment 4 0 Channel Display 7 19 Test Li 4 10 7 1 Replaceable Parts Actuator Logic 20 7 5 7 6 Suggested Test System Equipment 4 10 7 C 2 Replaceable Parts Actuator Channel Standard Abbreviations
62. 13 10 256 512 36 CMD UJ FORMAT F3 0 OUTPUT 13 20 36 CMD U FORMAT 3 F2 0 OUTPUT 13 20 6 CMD UJ FORMAT 2F2 0 OUTPUT 13 20 3 6 A 3 A 4 Model 3495 Appendix B APPENDIX B B 1 INTRODUCTION B 2 This information is provided as a general summary of 9825 calculator programming techniques for the Hewlett Packard Model 3495A Scanner It serves as a basic program ming guide which you can refer to when developing 9825 A programs for the 3495 Scanner 3495A PROGRAMMING GUIDE FOR THE hp MODEL 9825A CALCULATOR 8 3 HP IB Command Mode 4 Literal commands are sent using the CMD 7 state ment as shown in Table B 1 The command statement places the HP IB in the Command mode sends the com mands and returns the to the Data mode The select code is required and must correspond to the Select code on the 98034A Interface Card assumed 7 here Carriage Return and Line Feed characters are not sent when the CMD statement is executed The commands within the quote field of the statement ASCH characters corres ponding to the commands listed in Table 2 The 9825A statements that produce 3495A commands are listed in Table 3 5 The 9825A is addressed to talk and the 3495A to listen by the select code parameter in the CMD and WRT statements Addressing with these statements is shown in Table 1 B 6 The 9825A can send special command statements to trigge
63. 2 2 gt ES e e e E ESA wh E 42 Hn _ HS GORD CHINO QRS D qute so 2 e 2 E 6t ISNNVHO T3NNYHO 4i T3NNVHO I3NNVHOD 8 13NNVHO vi 13NNVHO i TINNVHO 1 ISNNVHO 9 T3NNYHO 6 IINNVHO 8 ISNNVHO 2 773 93 TENNVYHO 8 v I3NNVHO 2 TANNVHO TINNVHO SPY Glib5 S85 0 4 sig GAO EN T I RN TqwtoW53 pary Model 3495 Section SERVICE GROUPE FAST CONTROLLER OPTION 100 ACCESSORY 44413A Service Group E contains theory and service information on the microprocessor con trolled fast controller for the 3495A Scanner Signature analysis information is also included DELETE INTERFACE 8 ASSEMBLY INTERFACE 8 CONTROL ASSEMBLY Figure 7 1 Service Group Service information on the following assembly is in this service group Fast Controller Assembly Information on the 3495A signature analysis tests is included in this service group 7 1 Section VH 7 2 EXTERNAL INCREMENT INTRODUCTION 7 2 The fast controller opt
64. 4 Cotton gloves hp Part No 8650 0015 5 Switch Lubricant hp Part No 5060 6086 6 Dry Film coating one of the following Dry Film 88 General Electric hp Part No 6010 0142 Section b KENCO 811 Circuit Coat c KRYLON Acrylic or Dow Corning 991 d scotchgard if none of the above are avail able NOTE Make certain that you perform the wash rinse and dry cycles continuously The boards should not be allowed to dry between wash and rinse cycles 7 After the board has been repaired remove ali assemblies that may be damaged by water and 150 F temperatures e g LED displays batteries etc 8 Set the water temperature for at least 150 F Run the empty dishwasher with soap through one cycle to remove any residue NOTE For Triton use 1 2 oz 4 tsp per wash For Alco Zyme use 1 16 tsp per wash For Cal gonite follow directions on the box 9 Place the boards on their edges on the top rack 10 Run the dishwasher through the wash cycle only Use the amount of detergent recommended in the note in step 8 Don t allow the boards to dry before rinsing in the next step 11 The last rinse cycle should be completed with pre heated distilled water if at all possible To accomplish this shut off the water supply before the final rinse cycle begins After the rinse water has been pumped out turn off the washer usually just opening the door does this open the door and
65. DIGIT SPACE gq DELIMIT x i CLEAR t CARRIAGE CLEAR DATA RETURN DATA CLEAR L CLEAR E GET CLEAR ET L 20 OPERATOR SELECT DECADE ae If pata YO SELECT DECADE 0 NEXT _ CLEAR ALL DECADES state 7 4 SERIAL NUMBERS BELOW 1428400736 RESSED DIGIT SPACE DELIMITER en P DECADES DECADES IEN S LE STORE STORE CLEAR CARRIAGE CLEAR DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA E GET DATA CLEAR CLEAR _ CLEAR CLEAR 4 CLEAR CLEAR ae MM NO O y OPERATOR SELECT A CHANNEL m 0 Next CLEAR ALL DECADES STATE fF CLEAR A DECADE 9 4 5 wur 5 SERIAL 9 NUMBERS BELOW 1428400736 UNIT S ADD YES H D BiG EL SPACE DELIMITER DEL i NN l4 8 3 16 E cies Y DECADE SELECT u CLEAR CARRIAGE CLEAR TA DATA L OERO LL REAR E GET CLEAR 3 DATA CLEAR 00 DECADES sa gt 2 TURN ON 4 pn E m M me YE gt NO gna QUALIFIER oo QUALIFIER 3495 3909 Figure 7 A 6 Control State Diagram 7 11 Section 7 A 12 SERVICE GROUP A 7 A 40 When the Next State Qualifier and Memory Next State are selected to become the least significant digit of the next state number the NSO sig
66. IB data mode instructions stored in the 3495A if the 3495A is listening Device Clear DCL Opens all channels unconditionally My Listen Address MLA Addresses the 3495 so that it will listen Unlisten Address UNL Addresses the 3495 so that it will not listen 3 70 1 Data Mode 3 71 Data mode instructions consist of channel program ming instructions and specially handled characters Table 3 5 lists the 3495 Data mode instructions 3 72 Channel Programming Instructions 3 73 Channels are programmed to close and decades or duo decades to clear with two digit instructions consisting of a ten s channel digit decade select and a unit s channel digit channel select Instructions accumulate in two character fields with special restrictions on spaces and delimiters Accumulated instructions are executed by a Carriage Return CR Execute E or Software Increment S at the end of the instruction string or by the Group Execute Trigger command in the Command mode Any number of Actuator channels per decade may be closed simultaneously but only one Low Thermal channel per option may be closed NOTE An ASCH Carriage Return is automatically sent by many caleulators at the end of an instruc tion string and must be suppressed if not wanted 3 74 Specially Handled Characters 3 75 In addition to the ASCII CR and E characters an ASCII in the HP IB Data mode will i
67. The part number for the Front Trim Retainers is 27101 0326 quantity of 3 Page 7 15 The new ROM 4016 hp 1816 0895 replaces the goid ROM 4016 bhp 1816 0587 for serial numbers 1428400736 above Page 7 0 12 A41 The part number of an individual coil is 2140 0275 2 per channel and the pert numbers for a core 39170 1106 A42 03495 81901 is a package of 21 tested reeds 7 channels athe part number of an individual reed is 6490 1156 Page 7 E 7 SA Test Set Ups The jumpers which must be opened to gimplement SAQ are J3 410 7 E 7 7 E 8 Figure 7 4 The jumpers which must be opened ato implement and reinstalled aferwards are J3 410 The clock gilor SAT Configuration 1 should be set for a positive edge If an MANUAL CHANGES Page 3 B incorrect 5 V signative is obtained for SAT and the test configura g tion is Correct go to the point in the flowchart labeled Begin E Actual SAQ Routine to check the ROM and processor circuitry a Page 7 10 Table 7 1 Change the part number of ABUT2 to 03495 62501 NANOPROCESSOR ASSY The correct padded E value of ABR29 is included with this kit to simplify service Also the part number for the ROM 8010 is 1816 1171 The Mfr B part number for U1 US 5 8 011 013 014 016 U17 and 018 should be LS series TTL not L5 7 11 7 12 The signatures for ABU in SAt Configura tion 1 have incorre
68. amp n ss nteudlg 6159 0000 big ON asas on E 2004 smm Ru IS HILO SOSH 3341L Gi Uld gt j ut Sl 1921302 Ca by 98 Z tig ARISE RUE saniey d ag SEES YAUM S3A en db aoe da 5 0 5 304 5 2940 y OOOO sened 5 UM 0600 St CODE 6754 y ENEd El 0060 6nt4 a 9000 60 BOM 6084 04 en aul pjenu AOA 10805 A 91025 Uf 1 MOO AE E lusula 49U WS EY EE OL OD SEL OG POR da SIA 294400 5227320015 aseyi aay pry 6n d MODO enge PARA Uld 123 sanau 323342 s sanseu ig 400A 1084494 ASES asaul ON EN Ed 9000 uid engd 0600 9 tg en d 0000 Vid BN 600 ONE 1924200 21nieubic 85941 ANAS ui ORBULO OL SHES KOUM SoA OYE melde 0 DE Vid 0000 6054 gt Utd pi uid OPO ENES 1 Vid 9900 5 5 0000 6066 11444 in syarnl
69. anos albo 9 Mid BLY 5890 228624 rta SIA sje MIBUBIS ano 5 04P BUSIS AANBY 5 SLORY aldag ANDA pejgasiQQy you euBls GAH 594335 WS 10 400 Puy S34 f Need vi Uld nora i ilg 8250 CE ula Bingv 88iDn3 gut 39950 15205 as VadH Zi uig 8519 g Mid 9625 01 gina v SARIS Sah t 1294107 5 esau aay catt Gh Utd 1 uid 8440 uu 6972 6 uid ELNE Ute Gug uid 140142207 ameu SHANIRUEIS 9598 Zt Ot vig Sainjeubis YA seoct 919 5 eines 600 700 SS OD SABAH ALI 3 A 200 SYS Of 02 daoa 00100 EWS OD ey Anto 00 40 100 49490 3354207 sani 2324 8 ON NASE GE uld LOW H pE ula gr uld 8460 Zi ul Singv ainjeutiic VOLIO sanieufis ino BUN ON i L
70. be made simultaneously 3 104 Two Guard terminals are provided on each actuator decade terminal assembly Guarding principles are discussed Jater in this section 3 105 THERMOCOUPLE APPLICATIONS Options 003 and 005 3 106 The hp Model 3495A Scanner can be used to chan nel temperature information to other instruments This feature is available as Option 003 decade option or as Option 005 duo decade option The substitution of a Thermocouple Reference Connector for the terminal assem bly used in low thermal ohms or voltage scanning makes this possible 3 107 INTRODUCTION 3 108 The thermocouple decade and duo decade options are options 003 and 005 respectively for the Model 3495A Scanner In these options a thermocouple reference con nector replaces the low thermal terminal assembly of options 001 and 004 Installation procedures for all 3495A options are in Section IT Installation 3 109 The substitution of the thermocouple reference connector in these options provides the 3495A Scanner with the capability of making thermocouple temperature measurement without the use of a separate reference junction The following paragraphs review thermocouple fundamentals and describe the operation of the connector as an integral part of a temperature measuring system For further information on the thermocouple theory and temp erature measurements a list of references is provided at the end of this section 3 110 Thermocoupl
71. colon in the OUTPUT statement suppresses CR LF but these two characters are ignored anyway by the 3495A in the Command mode The commands term may appear in the FORMAT or OUTPUT statement The calculator keys that give the commands within the quote field of either statement are listed in Table A 3 Table A 2 Commands Command Selected Device Clear SDC Device Clear DCL My Listen Address MLA Untisten Address UNL 0000100 Group Execute Trigger 0001000 0010100 Scanner Must Be Listening Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Table 3 1 The HP 18 Must Be In mE 7 The Command Mode To gt _ Address The Scanner Comments Scanner Must Be Listening With The in The Command Mode 4 1 Appendix A 7 Computed Commands 8 See Literal Commands concerning the 256 term The command term must be an expression equal to a decimal number in Table A 2 CR LF are suppressed by the semicolon at the end of the OUTPUT statement In the free field format 13 the CR LF characters are initially suppressed by the semicolon but they will eventu ally be issued if more than 72 characters are output contig uously or under the free field format or if an END or STOP statement is encountered or if the STOP key is pressed Table A 3 9830A Command Keys M a e eremo n M a GET fg H DCL
72. eatem CAUTIONS Depress the LINE switch to turn on the 3495A only after checking the positions of the Indicates low thermal channel rear panel line voltage 60 if closed switches Press the LINE switch to release it and turn indicates actuator channels 70 and 72 are closed off the 3495 ON INDICATOR GREEN Connect the Hewlett Packard interface Bus here Connect the signal lines to scanned to the channel termi Position these two switches to nals behind this door See Fig select one of four tine voltages ures 7 4 and 7 6 for the chan Turn these screws counter before connecting the power assignments clockwise to open rear door cord WARNING YEA BEFORE ESA ON Be Additional Additional 4 Connect the power cord here Chassis Chassis Ground Ground 100 V 120 V 2110 0312 Taps Taps 220 240 2110 0202 Figure 2 3 Front and Rear Views 2 4 Section H AAW 3 1 DAMES Model 3495 rear of the cover and pulling backwards on the cover c Remove the front panel by loosening the four screws securing the panel at the horizontal tabs behind the panel Move the pane forward and off the instrument by pushing on the tabs Do not drop the panel 4 Install the 5 Low Thermal and Actuator Display assemblies in any order desirable on the four printed circuit extensions at
73. i en sani ubis Ettr ygd ELER VHLY 3 ENEd 0000 X 5 SOHY 9 0900 emm A c 6729 0000 81 y 6124 0000 2 1 614 9008 i 694 927 KT er m SISH 344 g4iv vosd c ewe TP TEN 8 1237 8689 ei L 6n ed 69000 Li uL ru It gie o e br So de ENEJ 000 L 5 bi oo 9 9625 uid ten in sn zn 5 Sehr VOld 3 gt 5 i aus TY vape C41 MA E PE 31 E ein 6194 0009 6 6000 6n2 d 94 01 i 6054 6608 2 1 6154 0000 mE H7 JdiL ii HOWH 9 Uid ae 8684 01 8810 5 en jta sm rin Br in t Eis cien 8 Vd3H 2 1504 9 2200 bt 1287 4834 0000 9084 91 11 2209 vt DHEd Qi G d 0008 2 amp E aumente ainieubie 1 j Lin Lin 8n im E m 14i 111455 HT OTWITI oce li PP 5 G 3152 Wawu GOO Y pad CE VS UNDS T 280 SL mx SI H prom n Ole an a na 4 Sp Er EETA AAAA AANA LAITY E g fl AS u
74. timer interval The close timer interval has been determined by the physical properties or the relays used The interval must be long enough to allow all relays to close and a reliable measurement to be made This includes time to eliminate relay bounce and coil loading and repeatability effects The close timer and opening flag signals are used to clock the unit s display and ten s display data into the relay and display control flip flops 7 D 18 The instant relays open is dependent upon switching speed In general switching times less than 1 6 msec cause the relays to open outside the open timer interval 7 D 19 The instant relays close is dependent upon switching time and relay current In general higher switching speeds and more current increase the time to close 7 D 20 The open and close timers are cleared by instrument turn on The logic delay open and close timers are R C selectable and easily modified NOTE Although easily modified the factory R C values were selected to guarantee minimal noise and a switching time under one 1 milli second Modifications to these values represent modifications to per formance 7 21 RELAY AND DISPLAY CONTROL BLOCK 7 D 22 The relay and display control block functions as a BCD to decimal decoder with a common driver and supplies BCD data to the displays 7 D 23 Data from the display control flip flops is passed to the displays and serves as input to the relay select circuitr
75. 003 10 V Options 004 amp 005 20 V d Review the stored measurements and determine if they are within error limitations for the divider Faulty relays will generally give near ground or out of sequence measurements 4 17 The 9825A sample program shown in Figure 4 3 can be used to test switching time performance of all 3495A options It is necessary to initialize a few user dependent variables first O Option to be tested 1 through 5 A Option close address 20 40 etc Line 18 has been left blank to include an optional prt statement for viewing channel measurements RELAY SELECT SWITCH H AC DVM 3437 A LAY EXT INC IN CARD REFER TO FIGURE 4 1 FOR WIRING DIAGRAMS Section IV 4 18 THERMAL OFFSET VOLTAGE TEST 4 18 Specifications 4 19 a The following specifications are verified in this test Opt 001 amp 003 Opt 002 lt 2 uV lt 30 pV Opt 0044005 lt 1uV 4 20 Description 4 21 This test verifies that the thermal offset voltage between terminals is within the specified range The chan nels are terminated in a short for this test Low thermal channel measurements are made at the common terminals Actuator channel measurements are made on the individual channel to be tested POWER SUPPLY hp 6237 A SCANNER 4 3495A 11 OPTION 100 8980315 EN hp 9825A IX REFER TO FIGURE 4 3 FOR SAMPLE 9825
76. 0166 2964 A20C6 0160 2964 CAPACITOR EXD QiUF 80 20 25HVOC CER 28480 0160 2964 AZOLT 0160 2964 CAPACITOR FXD OlUF 80 20 25WVDU CER 28460 2165 2964 20 8 0140 2964 CAPACITOR FXD OLUF 80 20 254406 26480 0165 2954 A20C9 0160 2964 OlUF 80 20 Z5WVDC CER 28480 0160 2964 A20CRI 1901 0040 DEODE SWHEITCHING 2NS SOMA 28480 1901 0040 AZORA 1810 0041 CIRCUIT PSIVi NON RPRABLE IN 28480 1810 0041 AZORZ 1810 0041 CIRCUIT 51 NON RPRAGLE IN 28480 1810 0041 A20R3 06823 2235 RESISTOR 22K 5 25H CC TUBULAR 01121 CB2235 20 4 0583 3625 RESISTOR 3 6K 5 25w TUBULAR 01121 83626 AZORS 0684 1031 RESISTOR LOK 10 25 CC TUBULAR GEL2E 68163 2051 1200 0473 SOCKETS ELEC IC 16 SLOR TERM 28480 1200 0473 42052 1200 0473 SUCKETS ELEC IC L6 CGNT SLUR TERM 28480 1200 9474 A20U L320 0 704 i 0611 SNT4 122 N MULTIVIBRATOR 01295 SNT4422N 2002 1820 0082 2 IG SN74 53 N GATE 91295 SN7453N A20U3 1820 0084 BGTL 5N74 53 N GATE 01295 SN7453N AZOA 1820 0070 IC s0GTLSGATE 01295 5574398 2005 1820 1130 1 IC OGYL SNT4S 133 GATE 01298 SAT4S133N 2006 1820 0819 DGTL 5474 175 N FLIP FLOP 01295 SN14175N 2097 1820 0328 1C DGoTL GATE 01295 547402 2008 1820 0839 iC OGTL 584 115 FLEP FLOP 01295 SN74175N A2GuUd 1820 0839 0611 474 175 FLIP FLOP 01295 SN14115N A20U106 1820 0788 58578 N FLIP ELUP 01295 SNTA
77. 0587 1816 0895 SNTALTAN 932406 SN7420N SNTATAN SNTATAN 587462 6410 0458 03495 04103 1206 0473 1200 0474 1251 0615 1251 3283 0360 1647 2190 0034 9380 1036 65274 1 080 03455 66507 03495 26507 51 22 30 380 7 15 SERVICE GROUP Model 3495A Section sanewassy 21907 BOLL TUANHSHJ MO OL 86g 2 vest 423135 38018 5 431 59375 5409920 19019 8 7 2 911014 95 15 378 31915 iX3N VIVO eSNW OSN 2 735 738 04 02 06 34915 LON 85 16 SNQ ISNG 103198 30090 iNsW3OvNvW 307930 6 any 31915 gsi Tl T p v e 2di AWS SNAL HOO m NAHL 8 9914 VIA Tue 03553500 9070 5 GOH Ssauddy N3LSPIND Ssayddy 3151 3IGYN3 SS3HOGV SS3HOGV LNSWNHISNI SNY 1d ANHI iG 1 7 3993045 31 ESNO ISNQ 9370 9190 35015 VIVO NAY od mm CIN pe X WOH 2010 u 7 A 16 EEE 8 56 Fem INSTRUMENT ADDRESS 1 URN mT 0000000000000000090006 MT r Pe Sate H w o Loud 62
78. 11 All safety information in this manual is identified by a NOTE CAUTION or WARNING safety heading These headings contain important information and should be NFORM ATION interpreted as follows NOTE An operating procedure condition etc which is essential or important CAUTION An operating procedure practice etc which must be strictly complied with to avoid dam age or destruction to equipment WARNING An operating procedure practice etc which must be strictly complied with to avoid injury or death to personnel 1 12 DESCRIPTION 1 13 The Model 3495A Scanner is a versatile system instrument that may be loaded with a combination of four Low Thermal and Actuator channel options Four teen 3495A s with four options each may be operated by a controller such as the Model 9820A Model 9830A or Model 9825A Calculator on the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP IB to provide up to 1120 separately program channels The Model 3495A Scanner may listen on the HP 1B but not talk NOTE One 3495A must be removed for each addi tional instrument on the bus 1 14 The Low Thermal decade isa ten to one analog multiplexers allowing the signals to be monitored by one measurement instrument in a break before make sequence An uncertainty differential thermal EMF of less than 2 uV may be expected on a channel Hardware assurance of break before make switching of 200 multiplexed low ther m
79. 12 OG 390195 sny dog diti STAN syoop ose peurs Jo 2185 pE Section VII Model 3495 b The logic delay timer delays relay selection by rentas the Timer Inter val and holding the Decade Close Signal to the Close Timer NOTE The open timer signal also clears the decade close flip flop c The Opening Flag signal is detected by the interface and control assembly which halts the transfer of data to the logic assembly until the relay has opened d The Open Timer Interval ends gating the Close Timer and implementing the Close Timer Interval e The Close Timer signal gates the relay and display control flip flops which select the proper relay through the Relay Select circuitry and provide display data NOTE The Close Timer signal also clears the decade open flip flop A f The Closing Flag signal is detected by the interface and control assembly which then provides more data to the logic assembly and prepares the sequence again g Current from the Relay Coil Drive circuit is sinked through the selected relay coil which causes the relay to close h The Close Timer interval ends and the sequence can repeat 7 D 44 SERVICING PROCEDURES 7 D 45 If a faulty reed relay or relay coil is located the assembly may be repaired by replacing the component or by obtaining boards from your local hp Sales and Servic
80. 1606 1251 3751 5000 9043 5040 6843 03495 66503 03435 26503 1251 2875 5000 9063 3040 6944 Description MOTHER BOARD ASSY CAPACITOR FXDi 0 2 100 10 5VDC AL 54000 475 109 25VDC AL CAPACITOR FXO 270UF 100 109 40VDC AL DIUDE PRR RECT EU OV CLAMP CABLE TIE Z VIODE PAR RECT 10UV CLAMP CABLE TIES 2 DiUDE PHR 400Y VIUDE PWR RECT 100V CLAMP CABLE TIE 2 DIOGE PRR RECT 100 CLAMPS CABLE TIES 2 5 D A 095 B NYL Land 095 B L RYL 1 5 395 8 NYL L 5A DIA 095 8 i NYL MISCELLANEGUS BOARD BLANK PC 55 SGL 10 5 GCUNNECTOR PUST TYPE CONNEGTUR PC EDGE 22 CONT SULDER SUPPLY ASSY 2 20 10 20VDC CAPACITUR FXD 1000PF 980 204 1000 0 CAPACITUR FXO SUUF I5 103 16406 AL CAPACITOR FXD 80 20 1000WVDC CAPACITOR FXD 2 20 10 20VDC 4 7 20 LOVDC CAPACITOR FXO U5UF 80 20 100 CER DIUDE SWITCHING 85 30V SOMA DIUOE SuITCHINO 205 30V JOMA BIGOE ZNR LIV 5 DU 7 202 4 TC t 0624 DULODE ZNR 3 92V 5 DO T PO 45 DIGDE INR 13V 5 PUx5wW TRANSESTOR NPN 243053 51 PD 18 TRANSISTOR NPN 51 PD 300MW FTzs200MHZ TRANSISTOR 51 FF 200MHZ FRANSISTOR NPN 51 PO 300MW FT 20CHHL KESISTOR VAR FRM amp 2 10 C Sit RESISTOR
81. 1820 0281 SNF amp 107 N FLIP FLUP SNT41G TN ALOUG 1820 0281 OGTL SNT 107 FLIP FLOP SN 1410 TN ALGUT 1620 0491 DoTL 5474 145 DECODER 5 7414 SN toug 1820 0839 74 115 FLIP FLOP 58141154 ALOUS 1820 0577 16 SNT4 l INVERTER SN7416N 1920 1056 1 5419 132 M COUNTER 50741320 ALOULL 1820 0839 SNT 115 FLIP FLOP SNTALTSN 10912 1820 0839 DGTL SN74 175 N FLIP FLUGP SN741735N ALOULA 1820 0839 OGTL SN T amp 175 FLIP FLOP 5N74175N ALO MISCELLANEOUS 1251 1959 CONNECTOR PC EDGE 18 EXTENDER 251 15 30 380 1251 2535 CONNECTURS 16 CONT MALE RECTANGULAR 1251 3535 50600 9043 PINS Poof BOARD EXTRACTOR 5000 9043 5040 6843 EXTRACTUR y P C BUARD 5445 6443 7 B 7 7 B 8 qti OE Lies LOG VS einposoig 3891 VS SEL 210311 00 Y 2214193 Ruornusnuo B amta LL agda Hd ven ASN ven 484 sepoN 3738 404 4670241 Yin Puy gen Mey Ld Hy 4903 ON ON 34 3921265 seinleuhrg un yl 13812079 sameus PED SUL el an Oin Soudan en s erder SAINPEVEIS 200 A zn e ON ON ON uongo saunreubig AFI 90109307
82. 2055 01 uF 100 V 28480 0160 2055 A40CR1 1901 0040 2 DIO Si 30 Y 28480 1901 0040 A40CR2 1902 0554 1 DIO ZNR BKDN 10 5 28480 1902 0554 A40CR3 1901 0045 1 DIO St 75 100 V 02713 MP497 AAOCR4 1901 0040 DIO SI 05 30 Y 28480 1901 0040 A40J40 1251 1959 1 CONN PC 30 2X15 EA 04507 251 15 30 380 A4001 2 1853 0012 gt XSTR PNP 01698 2N2904A 4081 0683 5115 1 RES FXD 6100 05 25 W 01607 5115 4082 0683 1305 1 RES FXD 130 005 25 W 01607 CB1305 A40R3 0683 0335 1 RES FXD 3 3 2 05 25 W 01607 CB33G5 A40R4 0683 1315 1 RES FXD 130 25 W 5 01607 1315 4085 0683 3915 3 RES FXD 390 0 05 25 W 01607 CB3915 A40R6 7 0683 1035 4 RES FXD 10 05 25 W 01607 CB1035 A4ORS 0683 3915 RES FXD 390 0 05 25 W 01607 CB3915 A40R9 1810 0041 1 RES NETWORK 9 PIN SIP 15 PIN SPCG 28480 1810 0041 A40R10 11 0683 1035 RES FXD 10 05 25W 01607 1035 A40R12 PAD VALUE RES FXD 0757 0460 61 9 K 196 03292 C4 1 8 T0 6192 F 0698 3280 63 4 K 1 28480 0698 3280 0757 3572 60 4 K 1 28480 0757 3572 A40R13 PAD VALUE RES FXD 0757 1999 21 5 K 196 28480 0757 1999 0757 0449 20 0 K 196 03292 44 8 0 2002 0757 4485 23 2 K 1 i 28480 0757 4485 40814 0683 3915 1 RES FXD 390 0 05 25 01607 3915 4051 3101 2094 1 SW TGL ASSY ROCKER 04990 76B08 RED 4001 3 1858 0047 3 XSTR ARRAY DA PIN 28480 1858 0047 A40U4 6 1820 1729 3 IC TTL LATCH 01698
83. 3 The third configuration is as follows a Start and stop _ signals at test point 2 b All dip switches closed c All HP IB data lines open 7 E 35 The scanner should increment through all possible channels 00 through 79 at approximately 1 2 second intervals Thus all decade and duo decade address selections can be determined and all displays checked 7 E 36 routine also provides known changing data throughout the logic and display assemblies for use in conventional troubleshooting procedures 7 37 5 2 813 TEST 7 38 third test checks the U13C inverter The positive and negative edges at test point 2 provide the start and stop signals respectively The configuration need not be changed 7 E 38 INSTRUMENT TEST 7 E 40 The fourth test checks the remaining logic and display assemblies The start and stop 4 signals are obtained at test point 1 The signatures given in the sig nature tables apply for options addressed as follows Option Tested Others Close Open Clear Close Open Clear 0 7 None None None 7 E 41 The SA troubleshooting procedure begins in Figure 7 E 4 The signatures are listed in tables located on the schematic pages in the service groups where the assem blies occur and incorporated into the procedure diagram in that service group Spaces are provided next to the diagram signature blocks to pencil in your test values for quick refer ence
84. 512 term may be omitted under the conditions described in Literal Instructions The instruc Model 3495 tion term must be an expression equal to a decimal number in Table 5 15 Computed Channels 16 The 5127 term may be omitted under the condi tions described in Literal Instructions The channel term must be an expression equal to one channel number 0 to 79 Three characters are sent to the 3495A under an F3 0 format space space digit or space digit digit The first sequence is sent for channel numbers 0 through 9 the second sequence for channels 10 through 79 This method requires 10 msec more time per channel than the previous two methods because of the carriage return and line field characters that are automatically sent A 17 A decade of channels may be opened by sending the ten s channel digit under an F2 0 format followed by an execute instruction Digits O through 7 clear decades 0 through 7 digit 8 clears decade 0 and digit 9 clears decade 18 EXAMPLES 19 Each of the following examples closes channel 36 if the calculator has talk address U and the 3495A has listen address 7 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 Appendix A CMD UJ 36E FORMAT B 2U B 36 OUTPUT 13 10 256 512 OUTPUT 13 WBYTE 256 WBYTE 63 WBYTE 85 WBYTE 41 WBYTE 512 WBYTE 48 3 WBYTE 48 6 NOTE 85 is decimal number for ASCH U FORMAT B UJ B F3 0 OUTPUT
85. 6 Set the DVM and Scanner POWER switches to ON 2 Open the relay access panel on the rear of the and insert the 3495A 9825A Test Cassette hp Scanner by removing the two retaining screws Part No 44195 10002 into the Controller tape transport NOTE b Verification Program Instructions Refer to the Relay Replacement Procedures Service Groups for step by step instructions on removal of the rear access panel and terminal assembly 1 Load the 3495A Scanner Operational Verification Check by pressing Remove the Terminal assembly from the Decade Channel assembly located on the far right as viewed from the rear of the instrument 2 Follow the instructions listed by the printer The 3495A Scanner Verification Program and the 4 Insert the Test Fixture into the appropriate Scanner Troubleshooting program are written for Decade channel assembly Make sure the Test 3495 Scanner select codes 709 710 711 712 Fixture connector is making a good electrical and a 3455A DVM select code 722 connection NOTE NOTE If the instrument you are checking does not have one of the Select Codes Talk and Listen address noted above check to see if any other instrument has these addresses If not then change the instrument address to one of those indicated above Refer to Section III Hardware Programming for instructions on how to change the instrument address Step 3 also con tains important information on multiple The
86. 89 NYHO MA 8 2 VE ZSI 8 251 a NVHO Ds A g2 NVHO Ds lt 251 A HR lt 86951 80 21313 TE KF Gees 5 V6 NVHO Cr VEZSL 8051 va 2 vezsi lt e lt 9251 H v4 Q lt lt V9 O 35567 lt EEC VS WEES am ai 2 BEZSL Ds YZ vezsi 2 88254 m Vi 2 Si VD LT 88251 86 NVH2 Dr EA 88 Q VEZSI lt 3 EA 92 Or be 89 NVH2 2 92251 a i CN lt Gb 2 vezsl 2 a NVHS 2 8525 4 1 82 NYHO Orr a A 9751 A 2 VEIL He SL 80 2 1 251 D Hte Si S p G 545 gyno 2 451 2 VEZSi 4 Y 8 251 3 D Versi 4 Darro vi D 51 4 6 72 aces V9 NVHO TEN 2 38254 vs ETS 54 f HESSE NVHO D 251 1 HESL 2 NVH2 D VEZS 4 6 BeOS Vi NVHO c lt 25 QM vno MOH
87. 909 Cabinet Assembly Option 907 and Option 908 combined part number 5061 0084 Option 910 An additional Operating and Service Manual part number 03495 90012 Figure 1 1 Field installable Low Thermal Decade Cii 1 Model 34954 1 28 ACCESSORIES AVAILABLE 1 29 The following accessories are available for the hp Model 3495 Scanner Shown in Figure hp Model No Description 44401 A Field Installable Low Ther mal Decade 001 44402 Field Installable Actuator Decade 002 44403 Field Installable Thermo couple Decade 003 444044 Field Installable Low Fher mal Duo Decade 004 44405 Field Installable Thermo couple Decade 005 44413A Field Installabie High Speed Controller 100 44095 Service Kit 03495 84411 An additional Access Kit 10503 BNC to BNC cable 4877 for Break Before Make synchronization of two scanners 1 30 The Service Kit is a field service kit designed to facilitate on site isolation and repair of failures in the hp Model 3495A Scanner A description of this kit is in the Service section of the manual 1 31 The Access Kit provides an extension to connector of the Al mother board for monitoring and testing One extender board is provided with the basic scanner 1 32 The cable accessory may be used to connect two scanners via the rear panel SYNC jacks Break before make Figure 1 2 Field Installable Actuator Decade pe
88. 92 INTRODUCTION 3 93 This sub section contains information on a few of the many applications of the hp Model 3495A Scanner information on programming the 3495A with hp calcula tors can be found as appendices to this manual As addi tional hp controllers are introduced operating notes con taining programming information for the 3495A will be come available and should be included in the support docu mentation summary at the end of Section I 3 94 The General HP IB Programming Sub Section describes the 3495A commands and instructions and 3 12 develops a programming model for use in translating specific controller languages to functional scanner control messages 3 95 Low Thermal Applications Option 001 3 96 Low Thermal channels are typically used for voltage scanning 2 wire ohms scanning and 4 wire ohms scanning Figure 3 4 illustrates the basic hookup for voltage scan ning Figure 3 5 is a physical diagram of terminal connec tions for voltage scanning with an hp Model 3490A Digi tal Multimeter Figure 3 6 is a functional view of this application Model 3495 Section CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL 9 COM MON EXTERNAL DIGITAL VOLTMETER 3495A GUARD LOW HIGH Vx T IA n rn aa A A eat OTHER DECADES Figure 3 4 Basic Volts Multiplex Scanning Low Thermal Option 001 3 97 A physical view of two wire ohms scannin
89. ADD CAPACITORS C14 C17 FOR S N 1428A01196 AND ABOVE 220PF 300 WVDC TRANSISTOR NPN Si PD 300MM 2005 2 RESISTEVE NETWORK RESISTIVE NETWORK RESISTOR IK 58 25 CC TUBULAR RESISTOR 4 7K 5 25W CC TUBULAR RESISTOR 4 7K 5 25 TUBULAR RESISTOR 4 TK 5 25W CC TUBULAR RESISTOR 4 7K 5 CC TUBULAR RESISTOR 4 7K 5 25BH CC TUBULAR RESISTOR amp 5 25 CC TUBULAR RESISTOR 4 TK 5 25W CC TUBULAR RESISTOR 4 7K 5 25W CC TUBULAR RESISTOR 467K 5 25bB TUBULAR RESISTOR 4 7K 5 25 CC TUBULAR RESISTOR 7 5 25W TUBULAR RESISTUR 447K 58 CC TUBULAR IC DGTL GATE IC DGTL SNT4 132 N QUAD SCHMIDT TRIGGER iCiDGIL GATE ECENGTLIGATE DGTL MC 4024P MULT IVEBRATOR DGTL SNT4 175 N FLIP FLOP IC DGTE SNTA 38 N BUFFER IL SDETLIGATE DGTL 5574 175 FLIP FLOS IC SOGTL SAULT IPLEXER 474 153 MULTIPLEXER ic OGTL SNT4 175 N FLIP FLOP ROM TTL IC ROM FOR S N 1428A00736 AND ABOVE REPLACES 1816 0588 iC ROM FOR SERIAL NO 1428A00736 amp ABOVE REPLACES 1816 0895 iC 5416 ATS N FLIP FLOP ECs OGTL COMPARATOR IC DGTL GATE iC SNF 14 FLIP FLOP T N FLIP FLOP 42 N DECODER OGTR SNF DGTL SNT CRYSTAL QUARTZ 5 00 6 HISCELLANEOUS COVER LOGEC BUARD SOCKET ELEC L amp CGNT SLOR TERM SOCKET ELEC 14 CONT DIP SLOR TERM CON
90. Applications 3 12 3 100 Actuator Decade Applications 3 13 3 105 Thermocouple Applications 3 19 3 107 Introduction 441 a e x AP 3 110 Thermocouples in Temperature 3 19 3 114 The Reference Connectors 3 20 3 115 Functional Description 3 20 3 117 Physical Description 2 m 3 21 3 L19 Sources EOF EAE RR 3 2 33125 WINS Conteris n 3 22 25127 G o rd CONCEDES e 3 22 3 129 Guarding in Temperature 1 3 22 3 131 Exposed Junction Thermocouples 3 22 3 134 Ungrounded Junction Thermocouples 3 23 3 137 Grounded Junction Thermocouples 3 23 3 140 High Speed Burst Measurements 3 23 3 146 Switching Guidelines 3 23 Section Page IV PERFORMANCE TESIS saxo Rat 4 1 ARMOUUCHONs s ji sey CR ee A 4 1 4 3 Equipment Required 4 1 4 6 Performance Test 4 1 4 8 Calibration bla de 4 1 4 10 Performance Test Failure 4 1 4 12 Switching Time Test 4 1 A e is 4 1 Aid Description bis Sea 4 1 4 16 _ Test Procedi RS 4 1 4 18 Thermal Offset Voltage Test 4 3 4109 4 3 4 20 DescripHon eho et 4 3 6 22 six HESS 4 4 4 23 Channel Isolation 2 4
91. E a 4 im ri a H fip Ju 44 aA AA j H 4 4 j i 1 1 t 4 t5 1 e whew bert ins 4444 4344 gt ros 4 EM rer r 4 den 1 m ul a 14444 The Operator must respond with numbers 9 1 2 3 defined below then EXECUTE TEST 4 Low reeds Low Thermal or A ACTUATOR 2 High reeds Low Thermal or B ACTUATOR 3 Guard reeds Low Thermal finished testing NOTE The message requesting a specific reed test is printed again after each reed test that is completed The input will be tested for valid number 9 through 3 An incorrect input will cause the controller to display INCORRECT INPUT The Controller then prints the Reed Test Message again will remain in this loop until a valid input is received b The Controller then instructs the Operator to check the setting of the 10 position switch and continue the program operation by printing re Irk rhe 904 4 pros tee dad 1 A pt E na p ur Per t ney m n 23 tri 234 i 4444 4 444 uud a alas 4442 49414 4 4 44444 que queer 114 ns unm pd dee t HER a m E ud 1 4
92. GW OL 108125 055 065 sjouueyo 18810 OLE joa slows Oi WAC 198 005 lVHl 33S Sls lUd 062 082 S AQV3H 1NOO SS3Hd 092 2 f 934 01 OLE ade el ABYOMOL J 14 JOUUVOS GL ony 1244 U PEAB2OT GEO s SRA Uy 24524 foopaoatsu pros GE ESSE ut HYNES He 578 B5i Scs 34 nuc ext IP 741 Dei TRANS 24 DL H MRDA BHMS Vd amp il 1844915 23452255 POR LANDS gil Wie dae H aati poty 25 HR 3 Ag AGM meg Fy VENLO ESNL 050 ip S BUD I3 OE val Jel 901 GMO gG0 34567214511 qr BQ Hd AO SHAH HAL OK SdA OW p BY S34 goi Wi att vAE ejs Hw 4990 4985 Buy ol WANE OLER UN 1 Ot WORRY WHO WA
93. H 1 ry pm H 4 ipa Ru uE PE be 3 i bp um de m 222 jen adan Ce Ia Tue ue PO 1 445 ab aed dau 152 ate lud ik dii inc d 1 42222 qa E 2 A m mr 11444 ve Jada 1 t tisi pa 4 1144 pe 1114 qe 42442 ya dias s we an err rn pe ir ur aa dn mH 4 u 214 a PME e e ues H nn br m 1 Pan m 2 1 3444 ET ote 331 ena Vm 15 4344 i m Pa Phoe vee aes m w H 422 qs p 443 444 cee T ie ater u amp ESECUTE FEST m Model 34954 Section Table 7 3 Controller Instructions and Operator Responses 2 When the program is continued by the Operator the controller will retest the channel assembly for a short and print 4 00 2 aM nu 4e m MI MI 1 Ej fe N Pri ij hl i ad 4 0 ius E fua re Aad dae hel 3 f the retest is successful no shorted relays the printout will be ses 1 ava asr ats MI 4 44 sarb jin
94. INVERTED OUTPUT CO CO C Section VII OOF OOF gt O Om Om oo 0 280 gt mn OOW 06002200 20 20 0 00 O O Q e e m aD 7 27 7 28 Model 3495 Section SERVICE GROUP A Service Group A contains theory and service information for the basic 3495A Scanner SCANNER CHASSIS RELAY FLA TN ELAY FLAGS CONNECTOR DATA DECADE SELECT E DECADE CLEAR 4 a EXECUTE LLLI 1 4 Dijo ms 4 5 CONNECTOR BOARD BE TEN S DISPLAY DIGIT ES CONTROL AA INTERFACE AND CONTROL ASSEMBLY HANDSHAKE MEME A2 POWER E MOTHER BOARD SUPPLY Figure 7 1 Service Group A Service information on the following assemblies is in this service group Scanner Chassis A2 Power Supply Assembly A4 Interface and Control Assembly with references made to the A2 mother board and the A3 connector assembly 7 1 Section VH 7 2 SERVICE GROUP A BASIC SCANNER 7 i The basic scanner does not consist of any channels lt does consist of the standard chassis the Al Mother Board the A2 Power Supply the Control Connector Assembly and the A4 Interface and Control Assembly 7 2 The A4
95. Interface and Control Assembly interprets commands and instructions from the HP IB and executes them on appropriate channels 7 A 3 Information in this service group is presented as follows a Power Supply Checks b 2 Service Material 4 Theory of Operation d 4 Service Material FAA SERVICE 7 A 5 The chassis rarely develops troubles under normal operating conditions The rear door should be kept on in good shape and closed to avoid excessive air flow through the scanner which may degrade performance All moving parts should be periodically checked 7 6 The Al mother board and connector are connector assemblies and require no periodic or special service 1 7 POWER SUPPLY CHECKS 7 A 8 Check the 12 volt power supply with a voltmeter across the 12 and GND Pins on the A2 assembly A reading of 12 volts 5 should be obtained This supply is used by the A10 High Low relay control circuit A40 relay drive circuit and the A13 A22 and 25 relay assemblies Filtering is provided by C2 regulation through the combined action of U2 and CRS Q2 is the current pass transistor and R8 provides current sensing for U2 The full load output current for this supply is approximately 1 38 amperes at 25 7 9 Check the 5 volt power supply with a voltmeter across the 5 and GND pins of the A2 assembly This supply should read 5 volts 3 if the adjustment in Section V was done properly The 5 volt supp
96. Key or SHIFT key corresponding to an MLA character in Table 3 1 with the following exception 5 fg Terminal ROM required calculator must be in TEXT mode See Terminal 1 ROM manual for further information 3 HP IB DATA MODE Tahle A 3 A 10 The methods shown in Table A 4 and explained in this section may be used to put the HP IB in the Data mode and instruct the 3495 to close and open channels Literal instructions are used when they are to be constant in the program computed instructions are used when they are to be variable dependent upon prior INPUT READ ENTER STAT or RBYTE statements or computations CR LF characters are automatically sent as an execute instruction at the end of the OUTPUT statement these characters may be suppressed by a semicolon at the end of the OUTPUT statement if they are not wanted at this time but see Computed Commands concerning suppression of CR LF under a free field format See Table A 5 for the list of instructions NOTE WRITE statement may be used instead of OUTPUT unless the calculator is addressed to talk in the same WRITE or related FORMAT statement Example 2 will not work with WRITE because it addresses the calculator to talk 2 Mode 3495 Table 4 9830 Instruction Methods 10 CMD instructions 10 FORMAT instructions LITERAL INSTRUCTIONS 20 OUTPUT 13 10 512 OUTPUT 13 WBYTE 512 instructions
97. Low Thermal Assembly Test Fixture 18 Part 03495 67901 the Actuator Assembly Test Fixture is hp Part 03495 66522 and the Fixture Cable Assembly is hp Part No 03052 26501 If you are not sure which assembly is in the location you have selected vou may determine the correct fixture by matching the connectors of the Fixture and scanner addresses the Decade Channel Assembly 5 Connect the Cinch Connector of the Test Fixture 3 Multiple Scanners The Scanner Verification Cable hp Part 03052 26501 to the rear of program may check up to eight scanners simulta 34954 SCANNER 34854 FOUN SWITCH REAR ease rer MN LLL P a mann TERMINAL ASSEMBLY LOW THERMAL TEST FIXTURE Figure 7 4 Scanner Verification Program Wiring Section Model 3495 neously The following conditions must be adher NOTE ed to for the check to perform properly MULTIPLE SCANNERS If more than one a There can only be two scanners per select scanner is included in your system the scanners code and software are configured to call the channels beginning at channel number 0 to the maxi b The first scanners must have the 709 select mum channel number in vour system See the code Select Codes 710 711 712 must be example below used in order 2 scanners each except for the last select code used Select Code 709 Select Code 710 1 or 2 scanners may
98. P3HC P3HC 051 0922 P3HC OO BON DIN U6 Signature F 051 3 23 8 12 97UH U7 Signature 1 11 PSUS 000 12 15 0000 23098 98 Signature 2 9900 3 9 4 153 0569 5 4423 GODO POLIO QU 7 10 0000 3209 T oy 3 1 2 4900 9300 12 71FF H565 13 4F31 P898 14 8000 72319 15 0000 2349 99 Pin Signature 5 Q7HU 6 P426 U10 Signature P3HC 426 07UH 011 Signature 1 P3HC 2 ATF3 6569 4 14 3 5 AHCS 5 A7HA 8373 7 POBA 4423 9 B7HU 10 71 FF H565 11 9235 369 F 12 2469 13 78 14 OC61 AUFS 15 4F31 P898 U12 Pin Signature 2 0U77 ACHP 3 4827 PF8P 4 HFPA 5 0158 6 7PA4 HAQH 7 39U4 9H5H 9 07HU 10 0006 4 9 11 2319 4758 12 5296 0000 2309 U13 Pin _ Signature eRe TT NRO AGGE PS UG 0609 2309 0077 SHSH 39U4 9009 30 9 5980 2209 060 239 0002 4 9 17PA C343 9000 2309 0000 P3U9 10000000000000000000 BC DEF HIKLMNPRSTGU VWxYz AIO hp Part 03495 26510 OT S CO gt _ gt uoh Pon Figure 7 B 6 A10 Component Locator RELAY CLOSING FLAG ens mm RELAY OPENING FLAG FROM OTHER ASSYS i DECADE DATA RELAY 8 DISPLAY STORAGE TOS TOS3 UNIT S DIGIT H we TENS DISPLAY DS CONTROL UNIT S STORE PUNIT S CLEAR TENS DISPLAY STORE
99. Power dissipation is 100 VA maximum Refer to Section HI for Instrument Turn On procedure The two line voltage selector switches on the rear panel must be positioned for the proper line voltage before instrument turn on See Figure 2 3 for location of these switches 2 5 POWER CORDS AND RECEPTACLES 2 6 Figure 2 1 illustrates the standard configurations used for hp power cords The hp part number directly below each drawing is the part number for an instrument power cord equipped with a connector of that configuration If the appropriate power cord is not included with the instrument notify the nearest hp Sales and Service Office and a replacement cord will be provided 125 V 6 A 250 V 6 A 8120 1348 8120 1351 UL LISTED FOR USE IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA 8120 1369 8120 1689 8120 0698 Figure 2 1 Power Cord Receptacles 2 7 GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS 2 8 To protect operating personnel the National Electrical Manufacturer s Association NEMA recommends that the instrument panel and cabinet be grounded The Model 3495 is equipped with a three conductor power cable which when plugged into an appropriate receptacle srounds the instrument The offset pin on the power plug is the ground connection 2 9 To preserve the protection feature when operating the instrument from a two contact outlet use a three contact to two contact adapter and connect the wire on the adapter io power line g
100. Program and the Scanner Troubleshooting program are written for a 3495A Scanner Listen address of 97 and 3490A Multimeter Talk and Listen address of and 6 respectively Model 3495A NOTE if the instrument you are checking does not have the Talk and Listen addresses noted above check to see if any other instrument has these addresses If not then change the instrument addresses to those indicated above Refer to Section HI Hardware Programming for instruc tions on how to change the scanner address Where multiple instruments are present in the fest system you may want to alter the program and store it on a cassette There are three series of displays or printouts where the controller requests a response from the operator The possible responses and a short ex planation of each is listed below a Controller Printout WHICH REED TEST WANTED The Operator may respond with the specific test number then press EXECUTE as shown below Test number TEST 1 Low reeds LOW THERMAL or A ACTUA TOR 2 High reeds LOW THERMAL or ACTU ATOR 3 Guard reeds LOW THERMAL only 0 Finished testing 0 Controller displays FIRST CHANNEL BE TESTED or LAST CHANNEL TO BE TESTED The Operator should respond with the specific channel number The assemblies are numbered 0 9 10 19 etc beginning with the far right assembly as you look at the rear of t
101. Scanner These sections also contain descrip tions of scanner specifications capabilities performance tests and applications 1 34 MANUAL STRUCTURE 1 40 Information on specific controller programming of 1 35 This manual is structured to simplify operating and the hp Model 3495 Scanner is included as appendices to servicing of the hp Model 3495A Scanner Information this manual A generalized programming model is devel necessary to operate the scanner is located towards the oped in Section to aid in translating your controller s front of the manual Information necessary to troubleshoot language into scanner control programs and repair the scanner is located in the service group sec tions towards the rear of the manual E 1 36 Scanner operating information includes general infor mation and descriptions installation hardware and soft ware programming testing adjustments and a generalized parts list This information is inciuded for all scanner option accessory combinations 1 37 Service information is assembled in service groups which cover the available sets of assemblies that normally require service in the scanner bach service group section contains theory troubleshooting information parts lists schematics component locators and functional block dia a grams Table 1 3 lists the service group description and 2 options covered each service group SEANAD Mee 1 38 E
102. Section bee beu ee E mrt atte bee aes 1 EP CET t d 7 69 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 70 It is improbable that more than one or two relays will be resistive or shorted at the same time An occurrence of this type usually means that another problem exists Typical problems that may cause this condition are listed below Also refer to the Operator Troubleshooting in this section a Poor connection of the edge connector between the Decade Assembly and Scanner To correct this first remove the Test Fixture then the Decade Assembly in question Reinsert the assembly Make sure that it is well seated into the Scanner b Poor connection between the Decade Assembly and the Test Fixture Remove the Test Fixture and reinsert NOTE The Actuator assembly is more likely to have this condition m Poor connection between the Test Fixture Cable and the banana plugs on the rear of the DVM d FRONT REAR input switch on the rear panel of the 3455 DVM set to FRONT Set the switch to REAR e Addressing Wrong Decade Check to see that the Operator input of the channel number during the Verifica tion Check corresponds to the decade under test f Select Codes incorrect Refer to the System Config uration Sheet to insure the address of the instruments used in the Verification Check corresponds to those used in the program g If the scanner will not respond to signals press
103. Signatures Hiepiaca U7 Correct Yes Check UFA And 7B Your Signature fs Check Signatures Ut4 Pin 9 Pin 10 Are These Signatures do Cheek Clase Switches 1 Correct ts U14 Pine Signature G7 HU a Replace 114 Check UT8D Short Pin 9 Ta Ground Replace 1418 is U17 Pin 3 NO Signature nr Replace U17 9922 YES is 11 Pin 18 Signeture Replace Ut Do Pi v d Troubleshoo Close And Sl O Timer Fiip Fiops 15 Toggle B Replace 015 j ls UES Pin Signature 2348 Yes is UTS Pin Signature s Ut Pin 6 Fast H BYES Utt 8 is U4 Pin 11 Signature AB 1113 Or 017 p FFF HDS A YES Check Signatures Your Signatursts 48 2 ACHP GU77 Pin 7 39 4 Pin 10 AGAD These NO Signatures ain Replace WB Correct YES Cheek Signatures Your Signatursts 016 Pin 7 6000 2309 Pin 2 099 P3 LG Pin 3 8000 2309 Pin 19 2000 PIU Pin 15 92000 309 Are Thess Signatures Correct NO Repsace 019 YES 1118 Or Ut1C Figure 7 D 5 SA Test Procedure Flowchart 004 amp 005 7 D 9 _ 19018 2 0 4
104. The summary page preceding the procedure diagram illustrates the test sequence 7 42 SERVICE MATERIAL 7 E A3 The following pages contain service material for the fast controller assembly Included is a signature analysis summary page an SA test procedure flowchart Figure 7 E 4 a replaceable parts list Table 7 E 1 and A8 component locator Figure 7 E 5 8 block diagram Figure 7 6 and a schematic Figure 7 E 7 7 5 7 6 Section VII en ow TEST PROCEBURES SUMMARY 1 AJ SA tests performed with 5004A hold and self test functions OFF out Ze Hyphenated signatures have alternating values 3 indicates predominant signature 4 Signatures included in the SA test procedures are in bold type 5 RED signatures comprise the abbreviated SA tests SA Test Set Ups ta DIO1 8 51 56 J2 J8 Clock Start Stop To Ground sag Closed Open TP3 4 SAt Configuration 1 Closed Closed Open Configuration 2 Closed Closed Shorted Configuration 3 Open Closed Open SA2 Open Closed Open Closed 1 Clear addresses of 2 7 Close address of 1 for Options 001 003 and 0 for Options 904 and 005 SA Test Procedure Flowchart ds Kernel Check Needed 001 amp 003 uf nz OWS
105. Upper 100 9660 1 0351 10K Reference 50 K 3660 1 0351 100 K 9650 1 0351 500 9446 1 0593 3440 1 0593 004 Freq Hz Lower Upper 100 9772 1 0233 10K Reference 50 9772 1 0233 100 K 9772 10233 500 K 9772 1 0233 1M 9772 1 0233 B Model 3495 Section V SECTION Y 5 1 POWER SUPPLY ADJUSTMENT 5 2 Only one adjustment is required on the 34954 the 5 V Power Supply Adjustment Use the following proce dure a Remove the 3495A top cover by turning the screw at the rear and pulling rearward on the cover me Figure 5 1 Five 5 Volt Adjustment b Connect a voltmeter across the 5 and GND pins on the A2 assembly See Figure 7 A 2 in Service Group A for the location of A2 and the two pins c Adjust 2 to give a reading on the voltmeter of 5 3 This adjustment screw is shown in Figure 5 1 d Remove the voltmeter and replace the 3495A top cover ernten nM H rn 5 1 5 2 H Model 3495 A Section VI 6 1 INTRODUCTION e Manufacturers part number 6 2 This section contains information for ordering replace ment assemblies Table 6 3 lists the assemblies in alpha meric order of their reference designators 6 5 ORDERING INFORMATION 8 3 Replaceable Parts 6 6 To obtain re
106. and Filter may be required before installing this accessory in mainframes with serial numbers 1428A02505 and below The modification im proves conducted suppresion to within VDE conducted RFI specifications with the 44413A installed This change is explained in detail in hp Service Note 3495A 3 Complimentary copies are available from your local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office Page 3 3 Paragraph 3 35 may help to label the DIP switches in this paragraph as switches positions switches shown are closed Close Address Open Address ON BNO Page 1 3 Table 1 1 Modify the Option 004 Crosstalk specification into 1 to be 100 kHz 1 MHz 45dB lt 45 dB Page 1 5 Paragraph 1 23 Better definitions of steady state are dynamic scanner environments would be a Steady State Environment An environment where the am bient temperature varies no more than 1 degree centigrade per hour 23 August 1978 1 C hour b Dynamic Environment An environment where the ambient temperature varies more than 1 degree centigrade per hour t hour but no more than 5 degrees centigrade per hour 5 C hour Page 1 5 Table 1 2 The temperature gradient along terminals from thermistor values may be deleted from this table as they are already properly located in Table 1 1 Page 2 3 Table 2 1 Options are factory installed according to the following table Table 2 1
107. and should be checked as follows High to Low Gption 001 Jption 003 Measure at the channel input terminals Measure at the channel common terminals A to BY P Option 002 Measure on either side of actuator relay interchannel Option 001 Measure from High to Hign and Low to Low between adjacent channels with one closed Measure at the channel n put terminals a Option 002 Measure fram A to A and Bto between adjacent with both closed M GUARD 5 GUARD 5 GARD Tim GUARDO Eon GUARD So hp Par 03495 6410 3495 Option 003 Measure from High to High and Low to Low between adjacent channels with one closed Measure at the channel in put terminals Page 4 8 Paragraph 4 37 Substitute an hp 3403C DVM for the hp 3455A DMM 4 4 9 Paragraph 4 37 Step Remove the TRIGGER AUTO BCAL end GUARD PORTIONS of this step as they do not apply gto the recommended DVM Pages 4 9 4 10 Paragraph 4 37 Steps Adjust for a DVM E reading of 3 00 volts E Performance Test Card Page 4 Change the Option 001 capaci tance specification with the channel closed to be A Closed lt 50 pF Page 7 16 Paragraph 7 62 The part number for the Fixture Cable mAssernbly used in this procedure should be 03052 61501 This cable dE refered ta on page 7 17 as well Page 7 4
108. basic format In all examples assume a decade clear address of 6 and that the scanner is listening and in the Data mode Complete instruction fields are shown as shaded areas Spaces are shown as 2 a The second successive leading space before a digit in a field acts as a zero All others are ignored Example Closes Channel 7 1 Trailing spaces after a ten s channel digit in a field are ignored Hd Closes Channel 74 b A lone digit in a field creating an incomplete field acts as a ten s channel digit and execution clears that decade Example 355 Closes Channel 35 and clears decade 5 duo decade 4 with options 004 or 005 c Delimiters separate instruction fields Example 4 5E Clears decades 4 and 5 duo decade 4 with options 004 or 005 NOTE Delimiters may be used in instruction strings to enhance program readability d All instructions in a line are executed simultaneously with priority given to the latest instruction Example 2 23 Insures that only Channel 23 is closed on decade or duo decade 2 NOTE This effects break before make sequencing on Actuator decades but is not necessary on Low Thermal decades NOTE This type of format can be used on actuator decades to open only selected channels For example will open only channels 16 and 19 without even momentarily opening the other channels within this decade y Section e The latest Low Thermal chann
109. interface and Contro Assembly 3 87 Refer to the algorithm developed for the program example at the beginning of General HP IB Programming The basic programming steps needed to perform each step of the algorithm can be determined from the scanner pro gramming model in Figure 3 3 The commands used in Step 3 of the Model and the instructions used in Step 5 have fixed ASCH values With information on instruction for matting the actual instructions can be determined 3 88 Table 3 6 uses the Scanner programming Model to develop the programming steps commands and instruc tions needed to implement the algorithm example 3 89 To write the final program you must know the specific controller language Even without knowing the con troller language you can develop an algorithm and deter mine what program steps commands and instructions are needed to implement your algorithm Once this is done translating the steps into specific controller statements easier 3 30 PROGRAMMING CONSIDERATIONS Option 100 3 91 Take care to avoid or suppress unwanted end of line carriage returns when defining first and last channels in a block NOTE The most recent first or last channel program ming instruction is retained by the fast control ler assembly Programming the first channel after the last channel will ensure first channel closure upon the first increment signal See instruction formatting rule APPLICATIONS 3
110. lator and hp Model 3437A Digital Voltmeter to form a burst measurement system sample 9825 program is given to cycle through one duo decade block of channels taking and storing the voltage measurements into a high speed buffer 3 144 The sample burst measurement program in Figure 3 20 uses a high speed input output calculator buffer to store ASCII data from the 3437A DVM The high speed buffer is needed when readings are desired at less than 4 millisecond intervals The 7001 byte length is needed to store the 7 ASCII bytes per reading plus the end of burst line feed character NOTE The calculator will generate an E5 error mes sage without this extra byte 3 145 The entire burst is transferred to the buffer by the trf transfer statement The free field formatted red read statement converts the 7 byte ASCII values to single byte readings in a for next loop From this point on the readings may be manipulated in accordance with your needs and application statistical analysis characterization etc 3 146 SWITCHING GUIDELINES 3 147 Here are a few guidelines to help you maximize the performance and lifetime of your scanner channels a The current that can safely be interrupted by a pair of contacts varies inversely as the product of switching speed and impressed voltage Section 3 24 Model 3495 BEST GUARD CONNECTED TO LOW SOURCE FLOATING SOURCE OR THERMOCOUPLE 34954
111. nul 444 41 4441 mm a aga 144 ao e 22 jum 444 rri ntm 1 44 4 1 n 1 1 vil gt ETES P E pj j a 4 en L m 1 H Pe n 1 n m 1 4 u u Stay Ea fes str Tene rr Meee 4 3 i v kha skas golle sep gt Jn 14444 nao grt 4444 gp geo Bodom n 3 po H d arr bj pod od n3 LER 4 uh ster d dan 2 tuy ane 4 DPEM SHITCES 1 THROUGH 5 18 POSITION SWITCH wh pen pen qm gms Quam j rin D pu Ww MN ap iy gt ft fat fee oe Section Model 3495 Table 7 3 Controller instructions and Operator Responses Cont d b w 4 Jr p quis abe t m ET 44 gt ip 43934 f ru aga 5 De i18 P SITIOH SWITCH my um DU n emp prm em d 4 ne an reget pute un PRESS ExEDZLUTE MMEN ve 14 7 Un 1 aot LLLI ah re 1 ir tte t a rs a a ut 441 SUB 222 i TMEL Hal de PESI TIGH S
112. of HI and LOW thermocouple connections The point at which guard connections are made is dependent on the type of thermocouple used In general there are 3 commonly used thermocouple struc tures classified by the type of measuring junction as shown in Figure 3 17 3 131 Exposed Junction Thermocouples 3 132 Exposed junction thermocouples are typically used Model 3495 GROUNDED JUNCTION UNG ROUNDED JUNCTION EXPOSED JUNCTION Figure 3 17 Common Thermocouple Structures for the measurement of static or flowing non corrosive gas temperatures where short response times are desired The junction extends beyond an end sealed sheath 3 133 With exposed junction thermocouples guard connections should be made close to the measuring junc tion on individual sheaths if a relatively low impedance path is suspected between the low thermocouple element and source ground see Figure 3 18A If no such path exists a low to guard connection at the connector is ade aute see Figure 3 18B 3 134 Ungrounded Junction Thermocouples 3 135 Ungrounded junction thermocouples are typically used for the measurement of static or flowing corrosive gas and liquid temperatures The thermocouple wire is phy sically located from the sheath by a ceramic insulator 3 136 A guard to low connection should be made at the connector to guard ungrounded junction channels Use 18 AWG or thinner wire to reduce thermal offsets 3 137 Ground
113. of greater than 0 3 to 0 5 ohms is lent products as per Step a indicative of approaching end of life For de switching higher capacitance causes larger 3 148 Further information on switching concepts can be surge currents during closing higher inductance causes found in reference 5 larger voltages during opening Fi wtb gt 24 RSF B START 12 Read the 1 dim RIiB808 HiAGASO HHI ST i values Set up hish 2 Transfer into variable speed buffers entire Burst GF bvyteszil d into BUFFER fmt 1 readings tfr Peds BUFF id far to 31 buf BUFFER HEE 7881 3 19 Hait for 15 red BUFFER ii Set 34954 BUFFER status i ALCI First amp Last to indicate 156 next I channels amp Exte that the data wrt feds TS rnal transfer is 18 car capability complete s be manipula urt ads LOSE if rds BUFF ted as Rer your 2811 ER 8 pplication 6 Frosram 3437 19 H 32603 OVE Figure 3 20 Sample Burst Measurement Program REFERENCES 1 American Society for Testing and Materials Manual On 4 Power Robert L NBS Monograph 125 Thermocouple The Use of Thermocouples In Temperature Measurements Reference Tables Based on The IPTS 68 1974 1974 5 Holm Ragnar Electric Contacts Theory And Applica 2 Moffat Robert J The Gradient Approach to Thermo
114. on any ambient value with no resultant mea surement error This is the method used in the Hewlett Packard Thermocouple reference connectors 3 20 3495 3 114 THE REFERENCE CONNECTORS A24 and A48 3 115 Functional Description 3 116 The thermocouple reference connectors provide means of accurately measuring the enclosure temperature This allows mathematical compensation for the arbitrary but known reference temperature and eliminates the incon venience and expense of an actual O C reference tempera ture A functional view of the reference connectors is shown in Figure 3 16 A temperature monitoring thermistor is tied to Channel 0 of the reference connectors leaving the remaining channels free for thermocouple connections The temperature monitoring and corrective procedure is as follows a Thermistor resistance is measured R NOTE Sample continuous ohms monitoring can cause thermistor self heating Select an ohm meter range which uses 7 or less depend ing on your resolution requirements Exp hp 3455A in the 10 kilohm range 1 mA ohmmeter current is advised if possible hp 24554 in 100 kilohm range high resolu tion to retrieve resolution b Reference Temperature is computed TR 5041 6 314 052 Equation 1 En R 7 15 TR c Thermocouple compensation voltage VR is calculated for each thermocouple type used at the appropriate refer ence tempera
115. puy 2500 184 sung eg BEN Of 304 9UQ 309425 pue 02 1400 604 pua 91 0487 404 OE wd 00 EL 3nd no oc flier OWS OL 10197 9pe2er 104 0586 sseJppw alpudoaiddy 10 4 ANSO SuUBtg uilM AUG 27350 4 s usg susp gN OV yl Aug M IG 501 SIG 19pos3g ODE AU peog gv al O 5 231 eur ain iej Apsdoid saog SIG 398 NO 350 SAB Bussi sen ejdsiqg iig SUN ING 3500 quiassy WS6PE SL eter ree ON B ule Sr st RADIA 200 OVS oo Sul ZOO CVS VS SOL and poned 499 Olg AISA OL SUDIOUAS 200 LOG yoayoay me Haoiddy 150 secede uds 40 8013 91 SUN SEN EOE v s esneo d SARTO ity i prn ages ud 9594 d 0000 2606 105 105 10 aay SoNNeudis y 3 T5 Sui SV 526 369 popp
116. resulting in zero open circuit voltage regardless of the difference in temperature In the case of To and being equal zero open circuit voltage results regardless of what thermocouple materials are used The National Bureau of Standards has developed accurate mathematical means for describing the voltage to temperature relationships expressed as polynomial expan sions or sets of tables can be used to accurately transfer thermocouple voltage measurements into temperature measurements For more detailed information on thermo element and thermocouple modeling see Reference 4 3 113 If the temperature of one thermocouple junction is held constant the open circuit voltage is dependent on the temperature of the other junction In this way the tempera ture of one junction can be used as a reference to which the temperature of the measuring junction can be compared The most commonly used reference junction temperature is 0 C This is also the reference temperature for the NBS tables It would therefore seem that temperature measure ments based on NBS type thermocouple information need be referenced to 0 C This method requires strict physical or electrical control of the reference junction temperature Deviations in this reference temperature from 0 C would create corresponding temperature measurement errors By electrically or mathematically correcting for reference temperature variations from 0 C the reference temperature could take
117. shown on the Control State Diagram that control the Logic assemblies and clear the Data Storage flip flops 7 48 Ten s Store Signal 7 46 Ters channel digit received during the HP IB Data mode is stored in the Storage flip flops by the Ten s Store signal This occurs in states 31 21 and 23 for the following typical instruction sequences TYPICAL INSTRUCTION SEQUENCE Ten s channel digit unit s channel digit execute N lenta channel digit unit s channel digit execute Space unit s channel digit execute Accepted as ten s channel digit zero 7 47 Decade Select Signal 7 48 unit s channel digit received by the 3495A develops the Decade Select signal in state 11 This selects a decade of channels by decoding the ten s channel digit previously stored in the Ten s Storage flip flops The appropriate Decade Select line from U22 causes the logic assembly having the appropriately wired Close address to store the unit s channel digit that is presently stored in the Data Storage flip flops U6 and U12 The ten s storage data 51 through TS3 are stored at the same time in the Ten s Display Storage flip flops on 10 or A20 7 49 Decade Select occurs in states 22 and 12 to clear decades If a delimiter or an execute instruction is received after a ten s channel digit the Data Clear signal resets the Data Storage flip flops to Q low outputs in states 14 and 16 Th
118. the key to clear the Bus Rerun the program 7 19 section 3495A Table 7 5 Controller instructions and Operator Responses The instructions to the operator begin as soon as RUN has been pressed Refer to the paragraphs below for discussion of each instruction and the response if applicable a After the header has been printed the controller will print TT 1 M 133 po E mal ar Wo Ti AJ ax pe in Ih Hiper Fros mantiala voi hed ore oroceedins then reiki eI wee ey LPR ut reaueztedaFERSZ HEHMBER Fas MI then At the end of the printout the controller wiil display PRESS CONTINUE when ready The operator should press the connus key when ready to 1 j begin the program en b The calculator will begin the test by printing Lik bora gs hiGHlorBi 2 1 237 Fe p td E t be ae my pid H display will also read Which REED TEST wanted The operator must respond with numbers 0 1 2 or defined below then CONTINUE TEST 1 Low reeds Low Thermal or A 2 High reeds Low Thermal or B ACTUATOR 3 Guard reeds Low Thermal finished testing NOTE The message requesting a specilic reed test is printed again after euch reed test that is completed The input wil
119. the calculator has talk address U and the 3495A has listen address 1 10 emd 7 Literal Instruction Model 3495A Table 5 instructions INSTRUCTION ASCH CHARACTER DECIMAL Digit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 48 thru 57 Space SP Clear Execute Carriage Return CR E External increment 9 External increment On First Channel Last Channel Software Increment No Operator Delimiter NUL DEL Any other character 0 127 1 thru 126 With preceding exceptions 2 10 wrt 709 36 Literal Instruction 3 10 wtb 741 4843 48 6 Computed Instruction 4 10 tmt 83 0 20 wrt 709 36 5 10 fmt 3 T20 20 wrt 709 6 6 10 fmt 242 0 20 wrt 709 3 6 Computed Channel Computed Channel Computed Channel 18 The following program cycles through channels 1 through 79 The instruction clears the previously closed channel before closing the new channel break before make sequencing Steps to take a measurement and store the data wouid normally occur between Steps 20 and 30 10 for X 79 20 fmt f3 0 wrt 709 C X 30 nextX 40 end B 19 To check channel relays a known voltage could be applied to every channel open terminais and a de voltage reading taken on each channel Resistive or open relays can be determined from the stored readings Table 4 9825 Instruction Met
120. tions from the controller over the HP IB The System uses the ASCH American Standard Code for Information Interchange code in bit parallel character serial form NOTE The conforms to the IEEE standard 488 1975 and uses LOW True Logic 3 44 The signal lines used by the 3495A Scanner are listed in Table 3 2 For convenience each bus signal line is identified by a mnemonic which is an abbreviation of the signal name Table 3 2 Signals 3495A Scanner Mnemonic DIO 1 7 Attention NRFD Not Ready for Date NDAC Not Data Accepted DAV Data Valid IFC interface Clear Signal Name Data Input Output 3 45 Data Lines 0101 0107 3 46 The 3495A Scanner uses seven of the eight data lines on the HP IB All of the lines are LOW True 3 47 Attention 3 48 When is low the HP IB is placed in the Com mand mode and the controller may place addressing and command information on the data lines When ATN is High the HP IB is placed in the Data mode and the controller or talker may place device dependent data on the data lines 3 49 Handshake Signals NRFD NDAC DAY 3 50 Transfer of information over the HP IB is managed Mnemonic Section by three wire handshake sequence The handshake sequence between a talker and a listener the 3495 is illustrated in Pigure 3 2 The designated Talker and Listener instruments must have
121. use the last appropriate De 2 MD Poe el 0 39 40 79 90 119 120 159 select code Select Code 711 Select Code 712 4 Each set of scanners must have internal channel addresses set up for 0 through 39 and SCN5 SONG SCN7 SCNS 40 through 79 respectively 160 199 200 239 240 279 280 319 4 There are three series of displays or printouts Controller displays MORE CHANNELS where the controller requests a response from the FOR TEST Y N 1 0 The operator should operator The possible responses and a short ex respond with planation of each is listed below e ore 1 comms lor YES and 2 NO A Ni a Controller display WHICH REED TEST Meo Ne WANTED NOTE The operator must respond with the specific test Answer yes if you desire to continue testing the number then press CONTINUE as shown below same decade assembly complete explanation of all instructions and Test Number operator response is provided in Table 7 5 Test 5 If you desire to run the Verification Cheeks for other instruments refer to the appropriate para graph for the specific instrument 1 Low reeds LOW THERMAL or A A CHANNEL ACTUATOR 2 High reeds LOW THERMAL Jor 6 CHANNEL ACTUATOR rerun this Verification Test for the next decade assembly move the Test Fixture to the new decade assembly see Equipment Setup and repeat the Verification Che
122. view the rear of the instrument the assemblies are numbered QQ 19 20 and 39 5 The program with the assistance of the Operator will begin to check each channel The Controller will instruct the Operator to open and close switches on the Test Fixture to test each channel separately An indication of the bad channel will be printed as soon as the maifunction occurs An example of the Controller instructions and the error message for each relay type is shown below Printout of Controller instructions 1 ny pe m y 1222 2 a rper 4 vu m t 1 3 p gee rn f 1 EU 444 44942 y 4444 443 1 1444 i 4 un 144 i qu quo fue n a me n 11 i pon 3 ER IN 1 in 422 np jut 4 24 ster the las ee asar eni 3444 7 177 Me ud or E 1442 tM m j 4 1444 44414 er gaea 14 4 44 Pipas 4 i s i tt a 1 aw et 44 3 4 4 E te pe mi dE Tu 141 Us EL BiG egg rer peret z apo spe T Qn 2 t gt
123. 01100 0101101 0101110 0101111 47 NOTE The Listen addresses are ASCII characters This is the factory setected value Table 3 1 Listen Addresses Section provided by hardware assignment of the 3495 A s HP IB Listen address on the A4 or A8 assembly Any number of 3495A s may be given the same or different addresses Different addresses among the 3495A s are generally used to give the maximum number of unique channels Identical addresses may be used for multiple wire scanning 3 40 Selecting a Listen Address 3 41 A Listen address must be selected for each 34954 on the HP IB by placing jumpers in the A4 Address jack or 8 dip switch corresponding to the five least significant binary bits DIOS through DIOI of any character in Table 3 1 A closed switch is a logic level 1 an open switch 0 A jumper in the jack is logic level 17 a jumper out 0 The numbering of the bits is from right to left on the jack The last two of the seven positions are ignored on the A4 assembly and used for initializing the external incre ment capability and implementing signature analysis tests on the 8 assembly Closing these switches enables the external increment and test capabilities on the A8 assembly Right parenthesis is the Listen address used in all examples in this manual and is the address set at the factory This is illustrated below A4 NO 10 1 CONNECTION
124. 044 164 zn ssaGiuunp Aldang ILO X981 122 402 sain cubs rads 0 PELE 6 5596 8 Van 9 Errr 5 0503 v OV B OWH 2 vdd Utd vico i OL eig 21187 Phys Sl Wid UE uid 29910 HOPG 7 VSd8 6582 ule 5845 6 Uld NET 1284107 337106515 saunzeuhis Hid aseo Oif 3242 Bay 5917199615 ano oda puw 49849 ON 6524 ameus S 9 MAL Rh 141 19015 at idi 14299 BR er u stzranblJuo 158 iS rre estos suonisOg l E OHRID OD 1259 Lys Hive AHHEUB S GE 5 XEM AROJ 40 PIH shut 485 X OUS 5159 1 Hy 207 yg GND Syryn ups asna RAOZ 8 BUL yayo UL 8035 7 137835 EL 14225 Lim ISR Sota 24637 sang WS 3591 OVS 24764500 SUDiliSOd YIHMS EFL TEYS OVS ueonop AMPO 159 VS HHL omit SjusuOdiuo PUY VENDIO ejqsug gir
125. 10052 3101 1726 3191 1809 3181 1728 11 1036 SWITCH PB STA MODULE DPDT SWITCH SL 20PDT 2 28480 82389 A10BT1 8100 3439 TRANSFORMER 28480 9180 3439 03495 00203 PANEL FRONT 28480 03495 00203 03495 04107 DOOR REAR 28480 03495 04 107 03495 24301 LENS RED 28480 03495 24301 03496 01228 TIFFENER REAR DOOR 28480 03495 01228 5060 8835 28480 5860 9835 5060 9862 COVER SIDE 28480 5060 8562 5060 8847 COVER BOTTOM 26486 5060 9847 5040 7202 TRIM 28480 5040 7202 5001 0440 TRIM SIDE 28480 5001 0448 7120 5234 LABEL INFO 28480 7120 5234 03495 10001 FEST CASSETTE 28486 03495 10001 7 4 9 V LIS V L OOTY TV Alddng amog 7 lt enar Qu i YEG LlHOIHAdOO BIGE I VSGPE CM ANVdNOO QuyvxOVd iignMaH LHH 36 000 42 huma rtm n i 3A09Y ONY T IE we ON ua AOR E wr x 1 Y EN i i MAA i i i NII E INS d aaen j i i LON e we ee M m EY SE eme va 62999 96220 0999 9670 AIGWASSY Aldd MS E3MOd MH3HION m dibus 28598998 AM nm 10
126. 150 0993 0150 0893 0150 0093 0150 0093 0160 0134 1854 0071 1810 0136 1810 0135 0583 1025 0683 4725 0683 4725 0683 4725 0683 9725 0683 4725 0683 4725 0683 4725 0563374125 0683 4725 06874725 0683 4125 9683 4125 1820 0070 1820 1056 1820 005 1820 005 1820 0567 1820 0839 1820 0421 1820 0328 1820 0788 1820 0616 1820 0620 1820 0839 1820 0068 1416 0598 1816 0588 1816 0896 1816 0587 1816 0895 1820 0788 1820 0706 1820 0069 1820 0077 1820 9077 1520 0214 0410 0468 03495 94103 1200 0473 1200 0474 1251 0615 1251 3283 0360 1647 2190 0036 0380 1036 1251 3691 1530 098 0380 0643 03495 66507 03495 26501 1251 2815 Part Number Oty 19 We gt AN x OP NO dar Description 5 CONTROL ASSY REBUILT EXCHANGE olUFE 306 35VDC YA SOLID OlUF 80 20 LOGHYDC CER CAPACITOR FXD 80 20 lOQ0HVOC CER CAPACITOR FXD 980 202 LoOwYDC CER OLUF 80 20 1004405 CAPACITOR FXD 40 208 100NVDC CER CAPACITGR FXO OLUF 80 20 LOQRVDC CER CAPACITOR FXD3 6 8UF 20 6 0 TA SOLIOD CAPACITOR FAD 80 20 i1004VDC CAPACITOR FXD OLUF 90 20 L100MVOC CER CAPACITOR FXD OLUF 80 20 100HVO0GC CER CAPACITOR FXU OLUF 80 20 LOOWVOC CER
127. 19 0262 11 1028 5 74 LEZEN MC14816CP SN74L514N SN74LS74N DMB1L597N 91 505 SN741 674N 5 741 558 1820 1691 SN74L604N SN74LS13B8N SN74L504N OMB1 LEBEN SN745128N 0410 1001 1859 Sb vi gt ELOY 5 9629 89810 id 8108V WPrin 1853 8440 5972 64d ELNE 89419 ASLO 9624 a nzeubig LINEV et nal by 96 4 LN Cd 8910 917120815 9598 SADA YH Ed GECY 6418 9598 a nieu amp is Singv I VEL gaon 4 91 LSHS L 0643 8910 9629 9471246515 LABY el 3598 Li 9 vino 9598 t utd 918 Vine Hd3d vino aunjpeubis Jvdv vino PING LASY Ed AG 1541 ENSANYLSNI VS GEHA 9 MASSE 5 aumyeubig 7935 G 1531 CYS Sn 0799 NENH 1489 cv8n 4264 2728 ainzeubis 9448 fst NOILVYENDIANOO HYCO GW Bd 2 SHESE ganpeubis SV uid A GF NOLLYEADSIANOO 3bGv PSL 3910 9665 95 ameu Lnav 6084 dd Gi du Oy ee 9
128. 2 7K 54 25 TUBULAR RESESTOR 105 19 25w TUBULAR KESISTUR 279 UHM 5 25R CC TUBULAR RESISTUR IK 102 25W CC TUBULAR RESISTUR 6 8K 5 25W CO TUBULAR RESISTOR 5 25W CC TUBULAR RESISTOR RES STOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR AESISFOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESESTUR RESISTOR RESISTOR OHM 5 Zu TUBULAR 21 OHM 5 2m TUBULAR 217 CHM 5 Zw TUBULAR 27 UHM 5 25W TUBULAR 43 2 1 1254 TUBULAR 10 OHM 10 25 CC TUBULAR 5 25 TUBULAR 4 87K 15 125 F TUBULAR IK 10 258 CC TUBULAR TESK 1 1259 TUBULAR 4a TK 10 25 TUBULAR 2 87K 1 L25w TUBULAR 108 10 25W CC TUBULAR RESISTOR 200 1 125W iC LIN AMPLIFIER iC LIN REGULATOR CABLE ASSY CONNECT OR PEN EXTR EXTRACTOR A2 MESCELLANEQUS POST ACTOR PC BOARD CONNECTOR ASSY GUARD BL CONNEC FOR EXFRACT UR MISCELLANEUUS ANK PC EDGE 22 EXTENDER BOARD EXTRACTOR BOARD 28480 28480 28480 11785 28480 2629 4480 262 89 280480 56289 56289 28480 28480 84484 94713 04713 28486 04713 28480 28480 28480 32937 01121 01121 0 121 91125 75042 75042 T5042 91121 24546 01121 15299 91124 24546 01121 16293 91121 03292 27944 07263 28480 8480 28480 8440 28480 Mfr Part Number 93495
129. 3 THE rg 14 Und Avge ne lt lt SE M 4 Sun UD Badai ATI Taso BZ E iT EE Fr JOH LNOO AW Tay 122135 Quvno AVIS c nurse pecus i SUE M A IO E hx NAL OS sAY 138 77 9 owt x MINE nee 010 973 NISC ud Cfi t dre st HIS us SC AWIR M HE 3041902 MOT Av AP 0I833 96750 44 SnoNOHHONAS 0007 IWAS3H 807 103220 1u2uoduio2 702 8 4 840813 TEC SUAQUE 399 56 ON du lIG99 G6p O ON 1104 du ov Eld 5 ld Eid Mee 8 5 b WEIS s IN 151 IVEISL e PPD ee oid pus nm d 1 Vg E 951 YEBI Hg 95 34 VBHD JEH 9 814 A ef SEIS VEISL E s 2792191 VESA yuo a EH u 5 Ald 2 j M Eid E ait nele v 4 E ld olei 35151 velsi zn SEF bed 2134 68151 j 6 WEIS E ARD sun 5166
130. 3495 3 4 Depress the front panel line switch to turn on the 3495 A green indicator is located above the line switch on scanners with Serial Numbers 1428 01626 and above On earlier scanners a green tab inside the line switch flips down to indicate turn on 3 5 Turn Off 3 6 Press and release the front panel line switch to run off the 34954 3 7 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 3 8 The following paragraphs describe the basic operation of the 3495A decade options 3 9 Low Thermal Decades Options 001 and 003 3 10 The channel terminal assignments and relay configur ations are shown in Figure 7 B 21 of Service Group B Channels are arranged as ten per option a decade Low thermal decades are ten to one multiplexers with one set of common terminals Signals are multiplexed to the common terminals one at a time in a break before make sequence This means that a previously closed channel in a decade opens before the new channel closes INSTRUCTIONS 3 11 Guard relays close before and open after the High Low relays on each channel Common terminals of low thermal decades in one or more 3495 A s may be connected 3 12 The front panel displays indicate channel conditions on a decade closed channel is indicated by the two digit number displayed on the decade s display Low thermal decade displays are shown in Figure 2 3 of Section II 3 13 Actuator Decades Option 002 3 14 The channel terminal assignme
131. 4522 02027 02763 28480 93216 28480 03282 032972 03292 93292 03292 03292 02282 03292 03287 03292 02292 03292 03292 93292 03292 03292 03292 03292 a RR 03292 03282 03282 03292 03292 03292 03202 03222 03202 3 03292 03292 03292 03292 03292 03292 03292 03292 03292 03202 28486 28480 02484 01698 02037 01698 01698 02406 02237 01698 01698 78480 01698 01698 01698 03406 01598 28480 PART 02495 565508 18013225 901582 0180 3847 0180 0352 150D107X002052 3500225 020 2 1500155X902082 5 J0300V V3 CR 1201 3040 521092932 CD 36622 1901 0040 2832 1393 1251 3283 4 1 8 0 1821 4 1 8 10 2741 i C4 T 2 T0 1821 F 4 1 8 10 2741 C4 1 8 TO 1821 F C4 3 8 TO 274 1 F C4 1 8 TO 1821 F C4 1 B T0 2741 F 4 1 2 10 1621 C4 1 8 T0 2431 F C4 1 8 TO 1621 F CA 1 8 TO 24 31 F C4 1 8 TO 1621 F 04 1 8 T0 2431 F 8 704621 4 1 8 70 2421 4 1 8 0 2001 C4 1 8 T0 1003 F C4 1 8 T0 1004 F 64 1 3 0 2001 amp 1 8 1001 C44 8 T0 1821 F 24 1 8 TO 1001 F 4 1 8 10 1821 F 1 8 0 101 4 2 8 0 201 1 8 10 1001 8 0 7501 CA 1 B TO 7321 F C4 4 8 T0 4021 F C4 1 8 TO 2181 F CA 4 8 TO 1421 F C44 8 T0 1001 F C4 1 8 TO G34R F C44 8 T0 201 F 4 8 10 1001 04 18 102001 F 18190269 18
132. 495A Scanner is approximately three 3 hours 3 121 The possible sources of error which could influence the accuracy of temperature measurements made with the thermocouple reference connector can be characterized as either reference temperature errors or thermocouple mea surement errors Many of these errors are quite dependent on a user s particular system Table 3 17 summarizes the 3 21 Section 3495 Sr gt Ref Temp Errors x 2 Meas Voltage Errors TOTAL ERROR Sm Sm gt Temp Errors Equation 2 Where Sy Seebeck coefficient at reference Type J Thermocouple and Sm 2 Seebeck coefficient at measurement Type J Thermocouple Tabie 3 7 Sources of Error Example Options 003 amp 005 ea Measurament Errors Reference Temperature Errars Thermistor Accuracy includes 01 C Thermistor curve fit error Temperature Gradients Along Terminais Static Dy namic Thermocoupie Tabie Conformity Ohmmeter Accuracy 3455A possible errors in a representative system These figures are for an hp Model 3051A Data Logger System using 1 year specifications for the hp 3455A Digital Voltmeter and assuming Type J thermocouples at a 600 C measuring junc tion temperature Equation 2 is used to determine the total measurement error less calibration error from the errors listed in Table 3 17 3 122 The thermistor accuracy and temperature gradient errors are inherent to the reference connectors T
133. 6 Cantina LEE certain switches on the Scanner Test Fixture until the shorted relay s is found The program will then output the error message on the printer Any type of defective relay may be replaced easily and simply by following the Scanner Repair procedures found in Service Groups B and C of this manual NOTE The Verification Check program flowchart may be found on Figure 7 5 7 61 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED 7 62 To run the Scanner Verification Check you will need the hp Model 9825A Calculator hp Model 3495A Scanner hp Model 3455A DVM 3495A 9825A Test Cassette hp Part No 44195 10002 Low Thermal and or Actuator Scanner Test Fixture hp Part No 03495 67901 and hp Part No 03495 66522 respectively and the Fixture Cable Assembly hp Part No 03052 26501 7 63 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 7 64 The Operating Instructions for the Scanner Verifica tion program are divided into two main areas Equipment Setup and Verification Program Instructions Model 3495 Section Vil Equipment Setup In order to run the Scanner the 3455A DVM Refer to Figure 7 4 for a wiring Verification Program the Low Therma or Actuator Test diagram ixture and Fixture Cable must be connected to the channel assembly under test and to the 3455A DVM Refer NOTE to the steps below for the proper procedure Insure the FRONT REAR switch on the 34554 1 Turn the 3455A DVM and 3495A Scanner Power is set to REAR switches to OFF
134. 64 41013 0160 2964 CAPACETUR FXO OlUF 80 20 254906 CER 616062944 105 9160 29655 CAPACITOR FXO OLUF 80 204 2594WVDC 0165 29654 41055 0180 0197 2 2UF 10X 20 0 TA 150522 5x902042 A10C6 0160 2964 OLUF 80 20 25WVDC CER 0160 2964 ALGCT 9160 2954 CAPACITOR FXD OLUF 80 20 25WVDC CER 01560 2964 ALGQL 1853 0020 TRANSISTOR PNP 51 CHIP POx30GHW 1853 0020 81052 1853 0020 TRANSISTOR PNP 51 CHIP PD 300Mw 1857 0020 ALORI 1810 0041 CIRCUIT PSEVi NON RPRABLE IN 1816 0941 ALOR2 810 00 1 CIRCUIT PSIV NON RPRABLE 1810 004 ALORI 0684 3311 RESISTOR 330 10 25W CC TUBULAR CHSIEL ALORS 0683 1035 RESISTOR 10K 5 25 CC TUBULAR 35 ALORS 0683 1035 RESISTOR 10K 5 254 CC TUBULAR 81 35 ALORS 0683 1035 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W CC TUBULAR 81035 1987 9583 1035 RESISTOR 10K 5 254 CC TUBULAR 281535 ALGRS 0683 1035 RESISTOR 10K 5 25W CC TUBULAR CBIC35 ALORS 0683 1035 RESISTOR 10K 5 Zok CC TUBULAR CB1c35 810610 0683 4725 RESISTOR 1 5 25W CC TUBULAR CB4125 1081 0698 3122 RESISTOR 412 OHM 1 125W FORS N 1428 00541 58 1 8 4120 ABOVE 41051 1200 0473 SOCKET ELEC 16 CONT DIP SLOR TERM L20C 0413 1052 1200 0473 SUCKET ELEC iC 106 CONT OFP SIDA TERM 1206 0473 1820 9511 IC SBOGTLIGATE 5574088 A10U2 1820 0070 ECSQGTLSGATE SNT430N 1003 1820 9070 SNT43GN ALQUS 1820 0328 ICIOGTL3GATE SN 4O2N ALGUS
135. 66501 2036237 9180 0498 6720277H040D12C SR1 46 39 FY 232H SRE amp 46 9 232M 581258 9 5 1 6 9 1 2328 SR1t46 9 2324 03495 2650 1205 0033 1251 3750 252 22 30 340 03495 66524 1505225902942 0150 0050 3002066015682 0156 0050 1500225 9020 2 1500475 0010 2 0150 0096 1901 0049 1501 0040 51 10939 194 SZ 10939 65 1902 9629 2053 1954 0071 1854 0071 1854 0971 338 SH 82725 82115 2 1 CH6825 83025 2 47 100 4 2 27 109 4 BWH2 2 T L00 J 82705 C4 1 d T0 43R2 F 5 Che 1 8 9 48 F1 F CBlc2l C4 i u TO TESE F C84 721 4 1 8 10 2971 4 1 8 0 201 LM3C1AH 723 03495 61606 1251 3751 3 304 590 2040 6843 03455 66503 03465 26503 251 22 39 389 5006 9043 5045 5843 7 3 Section SERVICE GROUP Model 3495A Table 7 A 1 Replaceable Parts Power Supply 1 2 A3 and A100 Cont d M Mir HP Part Number Oty Description Code Reference Designation Mfr Part Number AT86 NONE CHASSIS 55289 0180 0904 FXO D OSUF 28 1000 80 4 168A 4 A1008R 1 1902 1232 DIODE ZNR 1 389728 5 5V 10 04713 IN 32878 A108F 1 2118 0312 FUSE CARTRIDGE 250V SLOW 8LOW 71400 MBL 1 A1000 1 02 1854 0063 TSTR Si NPR 80131 SN 3855 410851 A
136. 7 3 18 7 5 3495 Scanning Verification Program Matrix Scanning 3 19 FlOwchart 2 240 7 23 7 24 table of Contents Model 5495 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS Cont d Figure Page 7 6 Reference Designations and Schematic SYMEOIS A a 7 26 SERRE OUD ad 7 1 7 2 2 Component Locator 7 5 7 6 7 A 3 Power Supply 1 2 100 7 5 7 6 TAS NRED Defined isus een aden 7 A 6 Control State Diagram 7 11 7 7 3495 A4 Assembly Troubleshooting TIS ac ez ans ducam dopo aa tuos d 7 A 14 7 8 A4 Block 7 A 16 7 9 A4 Component Locator 7 17 7 18 7 A 10 Interface and Control 4 7 A 17 7 A 18 Service GOUD B vo 7 1 7 2 Low Thermal Block Diagram 7 2 7 3 Low Thermal State Diagram 7 B 3 7 B 4 Low Thermal Decades Troubleshooting ute 7 B 6 7 B 5 SA Test Procedure Plowchar SA3 7 B 9 7 B 10 7 B 6 A10 Component Locator 27 841 1 7 12 7 7 AIO Block DiagraM 7 11 7 12 7 8 Low Thermal Logic 10 7 B 11 7 B 12 DI ONE bh cove y Gye 7 B 13 7 B 10 Removing the Terminal Assembly 7 14 7 B 11 Removing the Relay Board Assembly 7 14 7 B 12 Obtaining Access to Relay
137. 7 A 6 illustrates the control state sequence 7 38 The 5 MHz Control Clock steps the state machine through its 31 states along routes determined by three factors the next state after 30 20 or 10 is determined by the character at the Data Next State ROM 014 see Table 7 A 2 The next state after 01 and the delay in states 04 and 06 are determined by the Next State Qualifier multi plexer Ull all other states are selected by the Memory Next State ROM 1 15 The Memory Next State ROM also selects the most significant octal digit of each state number with its output bits MNS4 and MNS5 this is equivalent to selecting row 30 s 20 105 or 0 s in the Control State Diagram Figure 7 A 6 7 39 The Select multiplexer 010 selects the Data Next State to become the least significant octal digit of the next state number at the next Clock pulse when the present state is 30 20 or 10 The Memory Next State and Next State Qualifier are selected together to become the least significant octal digit of the next state number at the next Clock pulse when the present state is any other state than 30 20 or 10 This selection between the two choices for the least significant digit is made by the Data Next State Enable signal from the Memory Next State ROM Model 3495A SERVICE GROUP A Section VII Model 3495A NQ OPERATOR SELECT A DECADE EY CLEAR ALL DECADES SERIAL NUMBERS BELOW 1428400738 Sign DELIMITER 2 C
138. 75 53 53 gt NN EN 116 116 118 118 120 120 122 122 124 124 WW WW CO 02 CO CO Lu 60 84 86 124 126 126 120 124 RE 52 2 38 2 124 c o0 Equivalent to slowest installed option switching time Equivalent to switching time of the option the increment occurs on plus 80 usec SUULIUIi i 1 28 OPTIONS 1 27 The standard 3495A does not include any channels It must be loaded with one through four low thermal actu ator or thermocouple options These are supplied one per option purchased 44401A 44402A 44403 444044 and 44405A are field installable versions of options 001 002 003 004 and 005 respectively The following is a list of options available for the hp Model 3495 A Scanner Option 001 One Low Thermal Decade Includes A5 A10 A13 A14 assemblies Option 002 One Actuator Decade Includes A6 A20 22 A23 assemblies Option 003 One Low Thermal Decade with Thermocouple Reference Connector Includes AS A13 A24 assemblies Option 004 One Low Thermal Duo Decade includes AS 40 25 45 assemblies Option 005 One Low Thermal Duo Decade with Thermo couple Reference Connector Includes 5 A40 25 A46 assemblies Option 100 High Speed Controller Option Substitutes 8 for 4 Option 907 Front Handle Kit part number 5061 0090 Option 908 Rack Mount Cabinet Assembly part number 5061 0078 Option
139. 770 AISWASSY ATI HOLYR LOY AIBN3SSV TANNYHO HOIVPLLOV lt lt pim GI 12 8 i os a 2 2 2 Y g g 8 8 Y M 6 3NNVHO 8 13 2 3NNVH2 9 J3NNVHO 3NNVHO l3NNVHO TINNVHO 13NNVHO TANNVHO E V A 5190 HR Oey WO 1944402 AW Su Model 3495 Section SERVICE GROUP D LOW THERMAL DUO DECADES OPTIONS 004 AND 005 ACCESSORIES 44404A AND 44405A Service Group D contains theory and information for low thermal duo decade scanner channel options Each option 004 contains 20 measurement channels Channel of option 005 monitors the connector temperature with a thermistor The remaining 19 channels are available for thermocouple connections DUO DECADES SERVICE GROUP O I RELAY CONTROL 1425 SCANNER CHASSIS WITH TWO OPTION 0045 AND TWO OPTION 0055 CHANNEL CHANNEL ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR PAS DISPLAY DIGIS DISPLAY HPIB E os CONNECTOR RELAY FLAGS Mi ee _ DATA UNITS DIGIT TENS DISPLAY DIGT CONTROL DECADE SELECT _ASSEMBLY T DECADES CLEAR EXECUTE TOM DISPLAY gt 3 HANDSHAKE URN ON a i DISPLAY CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY BOARD RELAY CONTROL C
140. 80 0590 0568 A2 K5 0490 0563 RELAY 12 CUNT SA 1 5 FORM 2C 28480 0490 0563 0490 0568 SOCKET RELAY 28480 0490 0568 A21K6 0490 0563 RELAYS 12 CONT 5A 1145 06 FORM 26 28480 0492 9563 0490 0568 SOCKET RELAY 28480 C49 0 0568 AZLKT 0490 0563 RELAY L2VAC3 CONT SA 115 06 FORM 2C 28480 0490 0563 0690 0568 SOCKET RELAY 28480 2490 0558 A21K8 0490 0553 RELAY 12 CONT SA 115YDC FORM 2C 28480 0435 0563 0490 0568 SOCKET RELAY 28480 C49C 0568 A21K9 0490 0553 RELAY 12VAC CONT 5A 1L5VDC FORM 2C 8480 0436 0553 0499 0568 SOCKET RELAY 28480 C49C 0568 A22 NONE t thru 4 ACTUATOR CHANNEL ASSY 22 21 03495 88521 ASSEMBLY 28480 03495 66521 23 03495 54162 1 thru 4 ACTUATGR TERMINAL ASSY 28486 03495 84102 058 DSS En 000 00 00000 913 bir nei A 118 Oli hp Part No 03495 66506 Figure 7 C 11 A6 Component Locator gt gt ADAMO Ul IT Tg aa N2 it 2 282 H2 898 2 WE gt 2 8 A2 hp Part No 03495 66521 Rev A gt e ed E a E ie o lt rh m S6bcO AIBWSSSY TIVNWiHZi role ECV 9V Avids
141. 9 559008 pash 2q 352 1 50999 30569 PONY du Uy HOLY 241 idos _ 11498 97 di 2990 5 82742665 va vo 494 ana 70341001 ary 3035 dying 1 Puy simidowdody 39049 ON i uid Li 6 Mid Lui uld ucnead LN 42812 5341 LOIG gdan A 3 51 140u8 uousjnbriuco 218 Weer 3p 0645 ESO 962 ano new 195309 S4 sainipub s 33262 t 51 Yd El uld LI 6 uid Vig S ON STDIN REFERENCE DESIGNATOR ARCI ABC2 ARCS ABCA 8 5 79 12 14 15 ABC13 ABCRIT 2 ABCPS ABCRA A amp CRS ABR1 ABR ABRG AGRA ASRS ABRE ABR A48 RB ABRG ASR10 8811 ABR EZ 3 ARR 14 ARR16 8 17 8 1 798 20 23 AS8R22 ABR23 ABR24 A8R25 26 ABR 27 ABF 23 48529 A8R30 ABR31 ABR32 ABS1 ARDI ABU2 ABU2 5 ABUS ABUT ASUS ABUS
142. 9558 2140 uomnoung e si 8219 Aey eov d SUDE sr 323 ut odugqo 90 93615 Ul SUMJITA 91818 013002 943 POU 03 03 1495 51 88 e ew JOYs euo ap AQ sur ge 36 195 st 10 9SOJO 03 SABO 10 pormbal Jearsju euin OY 51 7 91838 2721 22 7 21815 1 OU ut 1err enb qunoj SE 0 20315 8814 POLOAUT 91815 Ut 5208 dvp 184 Suunsuq SIT 0 SISH ourrp 9814 eusis zoyp penb pry eui mun snf spuooos OULU 1noqe ATUO 10 8 51 9 93035 sry 19 41824 e dsrp pue au 0 JO loJsuei OUIYOEW 9215 SNOUOTYOUASE UB UI 591015 6294394 4011544 Hq 9805 e 10 segsnes e o1 eum Sep 941 SPINU 97876 TOL eduguo KAejdsip 10 10 oso o s e ol Aue 91039q IopiO 80 oni 08 jsnur opgoe pue sfgeug siegHenb OM 1514 oy 184 pue Q 597816 01 0 SUOonpuoo ure1199 iapun uo snjvjs oSueuo oj Aejdsip oued uox pue oy pey 909 Sur Y U10 sojejs INO oum eu opeoe p siengipenb oy seuss Joyipenb very Aq poiuo JMA 2313 10 snouoijugou se u
143. A PROGRAM Figure 4 2 Switching Time Test Setup 4 3 IV Model 3495A 1 pr nd uy E I1 i dir TES S 211 Press COHTINUE PHI I Liprt ent Option for 1 Test PAUL T sAtiI i3 Huumber a Hs if Y Lea 0 1 or 23 0 11 wrt next I Us Lose sA L i Es A eds ato es if Oe 64405 Leto wrt zum zc s Lo 0 CHEE lif 35 if Ozd ar 138 tfr zum s ermal Abe Ab Lets 2 1 EUFFEK ert FRULT R 4 ent H l4 aif asi BUFF ert for to deu zcan s ERT Ss ata 28 if Ads sun a rod l9 wth zum 11 6 buf BUFFER CUR Jls ilsert FAUL 1 41 33 7 16 de to L 1 130 Ce fmt ivi red BUFFER 29 next I 3 8 Fath gg 38 if PrndiVEia LIC 19 l ilS 8s prt fmt 19 nes JFRULT sR43 Hoste SD df Sa ate 351 Pru ert Option sis 9 fmt 3 for t L end 52732 Figure 4 3 Sample 9825 Switching Time Test 4 22 Test Procedure 4 23 CHANNEL ISOLATION TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED 4 24 Specifications 3495A Option 100 Accessory 44413A DC Null Voltmeter hp 419A a Connect the test setup as shown in Figure 4 4 The connector wiring in Figure 4 1 can be used for this test also b Place a shorting strap directly
144. ABLEN d 9G6 4612 t 4595 2615 LEE V Cvr t 69d Sl VHLV ELER vL 1900 84 SECO 1696 ct GASSET AZ Li at LHI 0 94596 20 5 94 8 L Dd8S 9pb4n 9 9518 3939 3 26 869 H6908 MZEE 9HZ8 89 9644 L 9 Gi 20947 vi EL cl CLEQ VHLV Li 4 Ett OL 6 S9SH A4LZ E 95268 35985 69vc 8293 84 1200 Lea 868d L id Sin EED VOO0S9 ELEN ENEd 4 0000 90807 nd BOOS Era DR DOO OBE GANA SION GAS 6f 0000 ameus vin ER ls m GIRE ZE BEd 0000 6154 9900 aos 0 EAE FRE SS ERBE sU Yl s m m 0090 Te agua lee BN DOD HOA HO6d vLH9 Yog EFN Cd 61 diH88 4 3Z YIS Etr 2208 co00 ein NLEZ 49H48 VOT IBV SHn neas uu 9644 NEGI IG 34 VYOOS s ELEN Eb 283 BIST 468 TECH V 69V 393 x c ivi 996c s YND 8 v208 ttivtn ounjeubtg LLN 50540909 9392 3684 262 ENEZ 00090 3991780978 000 BNE 0090 4964 0600 IV ma SH ontd 0000
145. ABUT ABUT2 ABUTS 14 ABUS ABUTE ABUT7 ABUTS ASY1 7 E 10 03495 66508 018040228 0160 3847 0160 0362 9180 0098 0180 0197 0180 1746 01404198 1901 0040 1902 3030 1902 0047 1901 0040 7250 0083 1251 3283 075741479 0757 4281 0757 0429 07570281 0757 0429 0757 0281 0757 0429 6757 0281 0757 0428 0757 0431 0757 0428 0757 0431 0757 0428 07570431 0257 0428 0757 0431 0757 0283 0757 0465 0757 0280 0757 0283 0757 0280 0757 0429 0757 0280 0757 0429 0757 0401 0757 0407 07570280 0757 0440 0698 2518 0598 3558 0698 4084 0698 3225 0757 0280 0698 4459 07570783 1810 0269 1810 0263 3101 1973 1820 1209 1820 1144 1820 1416 1820 1112 1820 1758 1829 1200 1920 1112 1820 1209 1820 1691 1820 1199 1820 1216 1820 1199 1820 1873 1820 1240 0410 1001 TQ aA v o c 46 M ud amb Fe Oy wk 4 Pe 9 oe sl gt DESCRIPTION SCANNER CONTROL 22 ut IBY FAST CONTROLLER OPTION 166 Otu l 50 VDE CAP FXD 510 pF 300 Y CAP EXD 100uF 20 V CAP FXD 2 2 uF 20 V CAP FXD 15 uF 10 20 VDO i CAP FXD 200 DF 300 Y 05 A 30 Y DIC GKDN 3 01 Y DIODR NA 95 11 V 5 DIOS A 30 V CONN RF SNC FEM SGOR CONN 24 PIN RP 1820 SL RES 2740 0 RES F XE 1820 41 RES FAD 2740 1 1820 0 RES FX
146. ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 9 9 1 2 CHANNEL CHNL 101 CHNL 20 EA E era CHNL 11 CHNL 21 CHANNEL 2 CHNL 12 DECADE DECADE DECADE DECADE ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 CHANNEL 8 AECA EA SERAN CHANNEL 9 DECADE DECADE DECADE DECADE ADDRESSES ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 3 4 4 CHNL 30 CHANNEL 40 1 6 CHNL 60 CHNL 31 39 CHANNEL 49 Figure 3 1 Some Decade Address Possibilities aora Model 3495A SWITCH POSITIONS SWITCHES SHOWN ARE CLOSED 99 CHANNEL ACTIVITY The channels on this duo decade will close on channel instructions of 20 through 39 and 60 through 79 Channel instructions for other duo decades will open the channels on this duo decade 3 36 Selecting Duo Decade Addresses 3 37 The duo decade addresses are easily set or changed on the DIP switch 51 NOTE The switching speed of the 3495A is deter mined by the slowest option installed with clear addresses Duo decades will not operate at their maximum speed in a mixed option 3495 unless the slower options have no clear addresses installed 3 38 LISTEN ADDRESS 3 39 Further versatility in the operation of the 3495 is DEG IMAL DATA BITS DIO7 THRU 0101 0100000 0100001 0100010 0100011 0100100 0100101 0100110 0100111 0101001 0101010 0101010 0101011 01
147. Close And Open Addresses DPR ERT Re N NAL BANYA CORN TS it Er NEL Check U15A And 9130 Synchronization No Relays Close No Dis _ play Digits Light intervals Present For DC Present Check U13B Some Relays Do Not Close Displays cuitry Filp Flops In Check The Relays Check U8 U9 U10 And 012 Check Connection To 41 Gates Relays Digits Light Check ABU And ASU2 Check 010 Pin 15 And U17C Pin 8 Check For Invalid Digit Refer to A4 Troubleshoot ing Tree Arx Figure 7 D 4 3495A Duo Decades Troubleshooting Tree 7 D 7 7 D 8 Kartinn XV Section REFERENCE Table 7 0 1 Replaceable Parts LOW THERMAL LOGIC ASSEMBLY OPTIONS 004 and 005 DESCRIPTION MER MFR PART Model 34954 40 03495 66540 1 PC ASSY LOGIC 28480 03495 66540 AA0C1 3 0160 2058 6 CAP FXD 01 100 Y 28480 0160 2055 A40C4 0160 3017 2 CAP FXD 015 uF 05 28480 0160 3017 A40C5 0160 2055 CAP FXD 01 uF 100 V 28480 0160 2055 40 6 0160 3017 CAP FXD 015 uF 05 28480 0160 2017 40 7 0160 2055 CAP FXD 01 uF 100 Y 28480 0160 2055 A40C8 0160 0194 1 CAP FXD 15 000 pF 200 04200 292P 15392 40 9 0160
148. D 2740 N RES FXD 1820 RES PXD 0746 0 RES FXD 3626 0 RES FXI 2435858 RES FXD 1820 92 RES F XD 2430 RES FXD 1620 1 RES FRD 2430 0 RES F MO 1620 17 RES FXD 2430 RES FXD 2009 0 HRES FXD 100 RES FEXD 1000 0 RES FXD 2000 12 RES F XD 1000 2 RES FXD 1820 RES FXD 1000 amp RES FXD 1820 12 zc 01 0 401 D 91 01 91 t 91 GT Bt la aa mb o m 4 NI HS FF NY AS 125 W ar t 51 UTE 6 A 91 cu OmoUd uu zZ22z2zzzzx sad Bt 32 GF D1 125 W A25 W 125 W 91 G 91 REZ FXD 1002 OF 125 RES FXO 200 9 01 126 W RES FXD 1000 0 01 125 PAD VALUE 5 20 K 4 5 7 32 4 4 02 35 2 18 FAS 25 1K 2 648 RES FXD RES F XD 200 01 125 Y RES F AD 1000 52 01 125 W AES FXD 2000 0 01 125 W RES NETWORK 9 RES NEFWORK 10 PIN SW ASSY Si TTL IC GATE FTL IC SCHMITT TRIG TTL IC FF TTL LS D TYPE IC BFR TTL LS iC INV IC FF TTL ES D TYPE SFR TTL IC MICPIROC MOS IC INY FTL IC DEDR TTL 15 1C INV TTL TTL LS iC TTL ERYSTAL QUARTZ Table 7 E 1 Replaceable Parts N Amer n rr rt Wi Ar an UR MA POLL PUAN Tun NAAR ae MER 28480 04200 32480 28480 04200 04200 04200 0
149. E i pp pe 4 ne iw fin faas nd ne de pe trt 17 poe Ea era i Elbe de n ala Saas e eh i ala t mM n Fm Inns 5 dae ina 1 due naan uh Mor 5 ATT PA If only resistive relays are identified skip to Step h 9 A shorted relay can be identified through the use of the Scanner Troubleshooting program If a shorted relay 15 detected during the tests the controller will print abe 2a as 99 141 3 sn P 442 1 aster t Praia ape a y irr ie Ma ac t i treet US 4 r Ser i sers MP FI qa prore 434 agso cpe omer gan 7 40 4 4 PELA SUI 244 ts f bp bee ll i i H t Eo E t 3 5 nj ir bs lu i de f t 3443 Lo E 8 ma b bee Tan t eS d Et 1 4 sose de ten ID aie aha em MT 3 str d das due Les 18 1 po 11 m 4 PS 4 my 1424 ft EEE 14 Ha 11944 f D pI 14 43 ay cp 1 4 o D p me ju Ha Hn P E 4 A EOS E H 4 D 2324 ho 4144 L fan dos IL dene ala 7 use ur uh 8 uod 1 Th
150. ERATING INSTRUCTIONS 3 1 Sele es 3 1 3 3 ua ES ee 3 1 3 5 Turm ers 3 1 3 7 Functional Description 3 1 3 9 Low Thermal Decades 3 Ji Xetudtor Decades 3 1 3 16 Low Thermal Duo Decades 3 1 3 20 Hardware Programming 3 2 322 Channel Hookups RR Ex 3 2 345 Decade Addresses lt koi 3 2 3 28 Selecting Decade Addresses 3 3 3 33 Duo Decade Addresses 3 3 3 36 Selecting Duo Decade Addresses 3 5 Jus Lister Address so ad 3 5 3 40 Selecting a Listen Address 3 5 3 42 The Hewlett Packard Interface Bus 3 7 345 Data 3 7 Table of Contents Section Page 3 47 AMOO a hig sS 3 7 3 49 Handshake Signals 3 7 3 51 interface Clea aves ad o es 3 7 3 53 Scanner Bus Capabilities 3 7 3 55 THE ATEOTIEDBIT Sa uoo e Cmn 3 8 3 58 Defining the Steps 3 8 3 62 Programming Model for the 3 8 3 68 Command Mode 3 9 3 70 HP IB Data Mode 3 0 3 72 Channel Programming Instructions 3 10 3 74 Specially Handled Characters 3 10 3 76 Further Special Characters 3 10 3 84 Instruction Formatting 3 10 APPLICATIONS 3 07 IBtFOGUCHlOnL s vocc un eR e 3 12 3 95 Low Thermal
151. Factory installation of Options Installed left to right from rear in listed priority Close Address nn Ia DL OFF NAAR Un man Close Address None Close Address nn i Next Ascending Vacant Decade Page 2 3 Paragraph 2 34 The last sentence should direct you to Service Group D Page 3 5 Table 3 1 The DIO7 thru 0101 representations for ASCH and Y characters are out of sequence and should be 0100111 0101000 y 0101001 0101010 3 11 Paragraph 386 Step 4 Add to the end of this example to conform with the others It should then be Example 2 9 Step Add an to the end of the first example to conform with the others should then be also 20 in the second exampte should be shaded Step M and Shade the numbers in the examples of these steps as they are complete instructions fields Page 7 4 Table 7 A 1 The part number for 410051 should be 3101 2216 Page 7 15 Table 7 A 3 The new power supply assembly part number 03495 66524 repiaces the older version part number 03495 68502 on instruments with serial number 1428A01626 and above Page 7 B 22 Figure 7 21 The high and low terminals on the A24 component locator should be switched Channels are assigned left to right in this drawing Aiso a note on the pin designators on P13 These pin designators apply to the physica
152. G 385 0 73 NAO 413 XD Ana 40217 96 MUNDO LIS San SU E Bunoou rason bss 129 SCL 26 FAROS 2 E3831 v e 0 bois 40123 AER 15 Mur 05 A auinnujan 10112905 BERL 205 ao Sg Aen per iulkuBEOR 4 95 TOA Wy HOHE BESO 355 M nsu 2581 EM 29 ON MEISE r HAVES sate dit UV nos 58 58 SHINY 5 USAR 7 QS 1 Y i eG 2603 Us dte 90 el Vi SAD 3901025 JO wi 395 19 INOS al uaua don r Lt IT HRE FL nig FH uN CO w PS 791 MEAG ft 2 ON 551 lig HIYA 5 0130 ESN MOTH PRONS Laos iid CON 1833 Y ON 1 SLP ON 1115105 Mes tios ga 534 BS y Pere ACQUIS Balz 9425 18 DL 4 pov i5 D CO CO 59 Mi 1851 9 85 Gucpauy i ON 3571 cU Mg
153. GH LOW RELAY CLOSE TENS DISPLAY FULL RELAY VOLTAGE STORE GUARD RELAY CLOSE GUARD RELAY OPEN l TENS DISPLAY TRANSFER INTERFACE AND CONTROL ASSEMBLY RELAY CLOCK __ 1 t 1 2 nnnm TN H DECADE 209 QUALIFIER ADORESS en PP QUALIFIER Be MACHINE 3979 Kun DECADE DISABLE Figure 7 B 2 Low Thermal Block Diagram 7 B 2 im a KR A Model 3495 SERVICE GROUP Section 7 6 Execute signal is received from 4 or 8 after Decade Enable goes true Decade Execute then allows the Relay State Machine to move out of state 3 and begin the relay sequencing cycle 7 B 7 Decade Execute is sent back to 4 or 8 as Relay Opening Flag to hold the Control State Machine in state 04 A4 only to allow time for relay opening Decade Execute is made false by Decade Disable in Relay state 4 but this does not necessarily make Relay Opening Flag false as other 10 assemblies may hold Relay Opening Flag false as other A10 assemblies may hold Relay Opening Flag low true via a wired OR function So Relay Opening Flag goes false only when all A10 assemblies that have been addressed reach state 4 RELAY amp DISPLAY STATUS High low reiay opens Guard relay opens or ten s and unit s digit may change digits may blank out Guard relay closes Unit s display digit may chan
154. Group 2 32 To connect thermocouple wires to the terminals the thermocouple reference connector follow this procedure a Remove the metal plate on the front of the con nector by removing the four retaining screws b Loosen the terminal set screw c Guide the thermocouple wire to be connected into the connector thru one of the baffles d Insert the thermocouple wire into the proper terminal e Tighten the terminal set screw to secure the connection f Verify that the connection is secured g Repeat for all the thermocouple wires to be connected h If guard connections to the points of measurement are not made connect Guard Common to Low Common on either side of the connector with 18 AWG or greater wire i Replace the front metal plate with the retaining Screws 2 33 Wiring the A45 and A amp G Terminal Connectors Options 004 and 005 2 34 The twenty channel terminal connectors are wired in a method similar to the ten channel connectors Installation procedures for these options or accessories should be fol lowed to insure proper channel activity The terminal assignments for the twenty channel connectors are shown in Service Group 2 35 Install any combinations of options in the four avail able positions according to the following procedure a Disconnect the power cord b Remove the top cover by turning the screw at the 2 3 247 DA
155. HAN A NO 18 GAUGE WIRE CONNECTED BETWEEN TERMINAL AND EARTH GROUND TERMINAL OR AC POWER RECEPTACLE te DENOTES FRAME GROUND USED FOR TERMINALS WHICH ARE PERMA NENTLY CONNECTED WITHIN APPROXIMATELY 0 1 OHM OF EARTH GROUND ASSEMBLY PERMANENTLY CONNECTED TO FRAME GROUND DENOTES ASSEMBLY DENOTES MAIN SIGNAL PATH er DENOTES SCREWDRIVER ADJUST ES us DENOTES SECOND APPEARANCE OF A CON NECTOR 1924 DENOTES WIRE COLOR COLOR CODE SAME AS RESISTOR COLOR CODE FIRST NUMBER IDEN TIFIES BASE COLOR SECOND NUMBER IDENTI FIES WIDER STRIP THIRD NUMBER IDENTIFIES NARROWER STRIP e g WHITE RED YELLOW ALL RELAYS ARE SHOWN DEENERGIZED 777711 DENOTES FRONT PANEL MARKING EACH GATE IS INDIVIDUALLY DEPICTED BY ITS LOGICALLY EQUIVALENT OR SYMBOL ACCORDING TO ITS USE IN THE CIRCUIT NOTICE THE LOGICAL EQUIVALENCE OF THE GATE AND THE AND GATE WITH INVERTED INPUTS AND OF THE GATE AND THE OR GATE WITH INVERTED INPUTS SIGNAL NAMES ON THE SCHEMATICS HAVE AN L OR H SUFFIX TO INDICATE A LOW OR HIGH RESPECTIVE TRUE LEVEL DENOTES GROUND ON PRINTED CIRCUIT DENOTES INVERTER DENOTES AND GATE DENOTES AND GATE WITH INVERTED IN PUTS DENOTES GATE AND WITH INVERTED OUTPUT DENOTES GATE WITH INVERTED IN PUTS DENOTES GATE OR WITH
156. HANNEL ASSEMBLY DISPLAY DIGITS POWER SUPPLY Al MOTHER BOARD am RELAY CONTROL DISPLAY DIGITS DISPLAY ASSEMBLY Figure 7 D 1 Service Group D Service information on the following assemblies is in this service group A40 20 Channel Logic Assembly A25 20 Channel Assembly A45 20 Channel Connector with Option 004 A46 20 Channel Thermocouple Connector with Option 005 AS Display Assembly 7 1 Section 7 D 2 7 0 1 The low thermal duo decade options are twenty to one multiplexers The addi tional assemblies covered in this service group are the 5 display assembly 10 logic assembly A25 channel assembly and A45 or A46 terminal connectors 7 D 2 The A46 duo decade reference connector assembly in Option 005 replaces the terminal assembly of Option 004 The duo decade reference connector minimizes temp erature differences between each channel and the terminals within each channel A ther mistor is used to monitor the temperature of the terminal This value is then used to adjust thermocouple voltages The adjusted voltages can then be converted into accurate temperature measurements The compensation procedure is discussed in Section HI Applications 7 D 3 Information in this service group is presented as follows Theory of Operation Servicing Aids Servicing Procedures Service Material 40 OF OPERAT
157. ION MI yg 3490A HIGH INPUT D E HIGH 0 SIGNAL REED SELECTOR SWITCHES 3 mo LOW COMMON HIGH COMMON LOW INPUT po a SIGNAL 31 TI 4 3 5 GUARD COMMON P L E 3050 B 4544 Figure 7 3 Scanner Test Fixture 7 55 OPERATIONAL VERIFICATION CHECK 9825 CALCULATOR 7 56 Description 7 57 The Scanner verification program checks each channel assembly separately inthe Scanner under test Bach relay in the channel under test High Low and Guard for the Low Thegmal assemblies and for actuator assemblies A and B is tested by the Scanner Verification Check If a defective relay is found the program will print out an error message indicating the defective relay channel number and the type of defect resistive or shorted 7 38 To determine if a relay is defective the program selects the DVM OHMS function and measures the input resistance of the LOW THERMAL or ACTUATOR CHANNELS This determines if each relay in a particular channel does not open less than 1 megohm or does not close greater than 1 ohm 7 59 In the case of a resistive relay as soon as the defect is detected the error message is printed 7 60 If or more relays are shorted the program will automatically load in the Scanner troubleshooting program first This program will instruct the Operator to open 7 1
158. ION 1 0 4 INTRODUCTION 7 D 5 The A40 duo decade logic assembly receives channel instructions from the inter face and control assembly and controls the relay and display assemblies The A40 logic is initialized by instrument turn on and relay activity begins on an Execute signal from the interface and control assembly The A40 logic assembly provides A5 display data and control and A25 relay control and drive current 7 0 6 DUO DECADE ADDRESS BLOCK 7 D 7 The dip switch S1 positions determine the close and open addresses for the A40 logic assembly The possible duo decade addresses 0 2 4 and 6 Positioning the dip switches is illustrated in Section Hardware Programming The address selection deter mines which channel instructions the relays close on and which decade instructions they open on NOTE An open address overrides a close address 7 D 8 The Decade Close DC signal stores the channel programming instruction in the data storage block and clocks the logic delay block which delays the decade close DC signal to the close timer establishes open priority and break before make synchroniza tion 7 D 9 The Decade Open DO signal or the Clear signal from the interface and control assembly will clear al units digits from the data storage block to an invalid digit of 15 which blanks the display and opens all the duo decade relays The decade open or clear signals also initiates the open timer sequence through
159. L CHANNELS OPTIONS 004 AND 005 03495 66505 ASSY DSPLY 2 03495 66505 ABDS1 2 1990 0490 DISPLA Y NUMERIC 1990 0490 5 1 14 0683 7515 RES FXD 750 05 25W CB7515 501 2 1820 1233 TTL DCDR 1820 1233 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS 1200 0474 14 PIN SOCKET IC C931402 1251 2034 CONN PC 20 2 10 252 10 30 300 A25 03495 00101 HOUSING OUTER 03495 00101 41 03495 66541 COIL BOARD 03495 66541 42 03495 66542 REED BOARD 03495 66542 P O 19 03495 81901 REEDS 03495 81901 A45 03495 64114 TERM ASSY 03495 64114 46 03488 64115 TERM ASSY TC OPTION 005 ONLY 03495 64115 REPLACES A45 46 1 0837 0148 THERMISTOR 0837 0148 7 D 12 00000000000000000000000000000000 A42 hp Part No 03495 66542 REEDS ON OPPOSITE SIDE 101000000000000 A41 Ap Part No 03495 66541 J45 OR J45 OO OOO AA 0000000 0000000009 1 A46 zx EE THERMISTOR ON BACKSIDE SS WEE LE G L H au E GUARD R10 JUMPER O A45 or A46 hp Part No 03495 64114 or hp Part No 03495 64115 Hid T ORY sproog oag oq QuVvMOVd zl3 2461 LHSIADOD LE RR evid
160. LTON AZOULL 1920 1089 3 IC DGTL 587 279 N LATCH 01295 SN74279N AZQUL2 1820 1089 DGTL 5979 279 N LATCH 91295 SNT4219N 29013 1820 0411 2 IC DGTL SN7 06 N INVERTER 01295 SNT4GON 2091 1820 0471 UGTL SNT amp Q6 INVERTER 01295 SN 74065 20015 1820 0839 IC OGTR SNT4 115 M FLIP FLOP 01295 SA 741 75N AZOULE 1820 0214 iC DGTL 5N74 42 N DECODER 01295 SN1442N AZCULT 1820 1099 OGTL SN74 279 N LATCH d 01295 SNTAZTSN AZO MISCELLANEOUS 1254 1959 PC EDGE 15 EXTENDER do 74788 251 15 30 380 1251 3535 CONNECTOR 16 MALE RECTANGULAR 28480 1251 3535 3000 9043 BOARD EXTRACTOR 28480 500 9043 2040 6848 EXTRACTUR 28488 5040 0448 FLS IL JON un SARAH 9243 j018njoy TIL anbi 21807 01009 aas SUL 2949 puy gf pue oin 30014 di4 JOJUOD 2 zin PUY Lin tin 59320 puy Opin 90 425940 1 3083989 QIN saeg 16810 puy 95012 9u soul 009 y Puy GLA PUY gn 19849 104 UO suet GF PUY yuelg sjdsi 42840 Agjdsig Lig 14817 Aejdsig Puy 25013 S B 2M ON Ud ON 1ng 85010 S B 9H ION s adwunf 48817
161. MASK 28489 03455 87102 1200 0474 SOCKET ELEC L4 CCNT DIP SLDR TERM 28480 1200 0474 1251 2036 CONNECTOR PC EDGE LO CONT SOLDER 11185 252 10 30 300 5940 5839 2 HOUSING ANNUNC IA TOR 24480 5041 5839 21 03495 66521 i thea 4 ACTUATOR RELAY ASSY 28480 03495 65521 AZICRO 1901 0040 DIUDE SWETCHING ZNS 30V SOMA 28480 1901 0040 AZECRL 1901 2040 OLGUE SHITCHENG ZNS 30 SOMA 28440 19501 0040 AZACRZ 1901 0040 OLUDE SWETCHING ZNS 30 28480 1901 0040 421083 1901 0040 DIODE SWITCHING 2NS 30V 50MA 26480 1901 0040 A21CR 1901 0040 DIODE SWITCHING 285 30V SOMA 28480 1901 0040 AZICRS 1901 9040 DIODE SWITCHING ZNS 30V SOMA 2480 1561 0040 21 86 1901 0040 DE DE SWETCHING ZNS 30 SOMA 28480 1501 0060 A2LCR 1901 0040 DIODE S4lTCHING ANS 30V SOKA 28480 1901 0040 A2LCRE 1901 0040 DL DE SWITCHING 2NS 30V SOMA 28480 1901 0040 A21CRS 1901 0049 DIODE SWITCHING 2NS 30V SOMA 28489 1901 0060 A21K0 0490 0563 10 RELAY 2 CONT 5A LESVOG FORM 2 2 84 80 490 0563 0490 0588 10 SOCKET RELAY 28480 0490 0568 AZEKA 0490 0563 RELAYS 12 CONT 5A 115 0 FORM 2C 28480 0490 0563 0499 0568 SOCKET RELAY 28480 490 0568 A21K2 0490 0563 RELAY L2VACH CONT SA 115 FORM 2 8480 0490 0504 0490 0568 SOCKET RELAY 28480 049C 0568 A21K3 0490 0563 RELAY L2VAC3 CUNT 5A 115406 FORK 2C 8480 0495 0563 0490 0568 SOCKET RELAY 28480 0430 0568 A21K4 0490 0563 RELAY 2 CONT 5A LESVDC FORM 2C 28480 0490 0563 9490 0568 SOCKET RELAY 284
162. MMING GUIDE FOR THE hp MODEL 9830A CALCULATOR 3 HP IB COMMAND MODE STAT or RBYTE statements or computations Table A 2 lists the 3495A commands 4 The methods shown in Table A 1 and explained in this section may be used to put the HP IB in the Com mand mode for addressing the calculator to talk and the 3495A to listen and to clear or trigger the 3495A Literal commands are used when they are to be constant in the program computed commands are used when they are to be variable dependent upon prior INPUT READ ENTER Table A 1 98304 Command Methods CMD commands LITERAL COMMANDS FORMAT B commands OUTPUT 13 10 256 FORMAT 3B DUTPUT 13 10 256 command COMPUTED command COMMANDS OUTPUT 13 WBYTE 256 WBYTE command WBYTE command NOTE A WRITE statement may be used instead of QUTPUT except to address the calculator to talk Example 2 will not work with WRITE because it addresses the calculator to talk A 5 Literal Commands 6 The CMD statement gives the Command mode sends the commands and returns the HP IB to the Data mode CR LF characters are not sent String variables may be used in the CMD statement if the String Variables ROM is installed in the calculator The 256 term gives the HP IB Command mode it may be omitted if it has previously been executed and the 512 term under binary format or CMD has not been executed since then The last semi
163. NECTOR i4 amp COUNT MALE DIP SERIES CONNECTOR 24 CONT FEM MICRORE TERMINAL STUD SGL PIN B SHER LK HECE NO 10 194 IN D 337 M FEM 255 165 6 32 THD CONNECTOR SINGLE ROW 36 FXO MALE CONT FASTENER APPLIES TO S N 1428 00506 amp GREATER REPLACES 0380 1036 EXTENDER 55 BOARD BLANK CONNECTORS PC EDGE 22 EXTENDER Section VII Mfr Code 28480 28480 56289 28480 28680 28480 28480 28680 28480 26289 8480 28480 28480 28486 28480 28480 28480 8489 31121 01121 01121 91121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01121 01295 01295 01295 01295 04713 01295 01295 01295 01295 07263 01295 01295 01235 284890 28480 28480 28460 28480 01295 07253 01295 01295 01295 01285 28480 28469 2460 284 80 28486 28480 28480 28680 284809 22526 90900 0046 234890 28480 11785 Mfr Part Number 0345560504 03495 69504 1500104X903542 0150 0093 0150 0093 0150 0093 0150 9093 0150 0093 0150 0093 150 0685 0006 2 0150 0093 0150 0093 0150 0093 0150 0093 0160 0134 1854 0071 1810 0136 1810 0136 81025 664725 684125 286725 ca4125 C84125 84 725 684125 2184729 684725 84725 284325 84725 SA7430N SNT4132N SNTAOON SKTAGON MC4024P SNTALTSN SNT438N SNT402N 55741768 9322060 SAT4153N SNT4LTSN 5874108 1816 0596 1816 0588 1816 0588 1816
164. No 03495 67901 and hp Part No 03495 66522 respectively and the Fixture Cable Assembly hp Part 03495 61605 7 38 Operating Instructions 7 39 The Operating Instructions for the Scanner Verifica tion program are divided into three main areas Equipment Setup Verification Program Instructions and Trouble shooting Program Instructions Equipment Setup In order to run the Scanner Verifi cation Program the Low Thermal or Actuator Test Fixture and Fixture Cable must be connected to the channel assem bly under test and to the 3490A Multimeter Refer to the steps below for the proper procedure 1 Turn the 3490A Multimeter and 3495A Scanner Power switches to OFF 2 Open the relay access panel on the rear of the Scanner by removing the two retaining screws NOTE Refer to the Relay Replacement Procedures Service Groups B and C for step by step instruc tions on removal of the rear access panel and terminal assembly 3 Remove the Terminal assembly from the Decade Channel assembly located on the far right as viewed from the rear of the instrument 4 Insert the Test Fixture into the appropriate Decade channel assembly Make sure the Test Fixture connector is making a good electrical con nection NOTE The Low Thermal assembly Test Fixture is hp Part No 03495 67901 the Actuator Assembly Test Fixture is hp Part No 03495 66522 and the Fixture Cable Assembly is hp Part No 03495 61605 If you a
165. OLOR CODE IS THE SAME AS THE RESISTOR COLOR CODE FIRST ELET OR STAND NUMBER INDICATES BASE COLOR SECOND 1 OFF TERMINAL MAY OR NUMBER INDENTIFIES WIDER STRIP AO MAY NOT BE NUMBERED COMPLETE THE THIRD INDICATES THE NARROWER STRIP 924 DENOTES WHT RED YEL WIRE a 2 92 DESIGNATOR IS ALAN PHOTO CHOPPER OSC d Model 3495A symbols used throughout the service section of this Data Not Accepted Number of Readings Not Ready For Data Program Address Programmable Read Oni y Memory Random Access Memory Reference Remote Enable Read Oniy Memory Read Write Low Read Signature Analysis Signature Analysis Test Service Group Second Trigger a 3 MALE STANDOFF FEMALE PIN CONNECTOR TOR WHT RED WIRE gt OR OT BE e T PARTIAL REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ARE SHOWN PREFIX WITH ASSEMBLY OR SUBASSEMBLY DESIGNATION S OR BOTH FOR COMPLETE DESIGNATION STD B 2192 Figure 7 G Reference Designations and Schematic Symbols Model 3495 E41 E GENERAL SCHEMATIC NOTES PARTIAL REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ARE SHOWN PREFIX WITH ASSEMBLY OR SUBASSEMBLY DESIG NATION S OR BOTH FOR COMPLETE DESIGNATION COMPONENT VALUES ARE SHOWN AS FOLLOWS UN LESS OTHERWISE NOTED RESISTANCE IN OHMS CAPACITANCE IN MICROFARADS INDUCTANCE IN MILLIHENRIES DENOTES EARTH GROUND USED FOR TERMINALS WITH NO LESS T
166. OM Verification Test 7 E 32 This test checks the ROM and nanoprocessor if the power supply signature is incorrect although the test set up is correct Test point 3 _ provides the clock The positive and negative edges at test point 4 provide the start and stop signals respectively for this test Open the jumpers at the ROM output lines Pins 9 11 13 17 Using hp Model 5004A Signature Analyzer check the signatures at the pins listed in the SA troubleshooting procedure diagram 7 E 33 SA1 HP iB Data Bus Tests 7 E 34 The second test checks the circuitry which affects the data bus The positive and negative edges at test poins 1 and 2 provide the start and stop signals respectively The ROM jumpers are in for all remaining tests This test requires three configurations to implement its three parts For each part a configure the circuit b Turn on the 3495A c Proceed to check the signatures as directed on the SA troubleshooting procedure diagram CONFIGURATION 1 The first configuration is as follows a Start and stop 1 signals at Test Point 1 b All dip switches open except S7 c HP IB data lines open YEE Cantina VIT 249454 CONFIGURATION 2 The second configuration is as follows a Start and stop signals at test point 2 b dip switches open except 7 c Ali data lines shorted to ground CONFIGURATION
167. Opt 001 10 Channel Opt 002 10 Channel Opt 004 20 Channel Low Thermal Actuator Low Thermal High to Low Channel Capacitance Open lt 15 pF lt 350 Closed lt 15 pF 400 pF Frequency Response 10 kHz Up to 100 kHz x O 3dB Up to 100 kHz 0 3dB Up to 1 MHz 0 20 dB reference 50 2 load Up to 1 MHz dB Up to 1 MHz 0 5 dB Cross Talk i Open Channel Termination 100 kHz 1 MHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 50 2 lt 70dB lt 50 70dB lt 50dB lt 710dB lt 5OdB 1 MO lt 33dB lt 30 30dB lt 30d8 lt BO lt 50dB Temperature Performance Option 003 005 Accessories 44403A 44405A Reference Junction Relay Assemblies Thermistor Accuracy 02 C Temperature Gradient Along Terminals From Thermistor Steady State 0 1 C Maximum Dynamic 9 3 C Maximum Thermocouple Measurement Accuracy The following graphs represent performance for various types of thermocouptes under steady state and dynamic conditions The accuracy includes such errors as thermistor accuracy temperature aradients thermal offset thermistor curve fit accuracy and thermistor iead resistance Applies to ambient temperature 1 C deviations Applies to ambient temperature step of 5 C or 5 C hour maximum rate of change 1 3 Rew Ww E MOUCI SAID A Table 1 1 Specifications Cont d TYPE JTHERWMOCDUPLLES gt 766 TEMPERAYUAE MEASUREMENT rt
168. S N A24 DATA EEA O A AMA a THERMO CHANNEL CONTROL ASSEMBLY INTERFACE 8 CONTROL ASSEMBLY d EXECUTE TURN ON y CONNECTOR DISPLAY LOGIC ASSEMBLY HANDSHAKE DISPLAY ASSEMBLY BOARD RELAY CONTROL AS 3 CHANNEL THERMAL A2 ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR nn DISPLAY AS SUPPLY DISPLAY Al MOTHER SOARD ASSEMBLY RELAY CONTROL 5 A24 anne THERMO COUPLE CONNECTOR CHANNEL ASSEMBLY DISPLAY DIGITS is DISPLAY ASSEMBLY 34954 A 9928 Figure 7 B 1 Service Group B Service Information on the following assemblies is in this service group 5 Display Assembly 1 Logic Assembly 13 Channel Assembly 14 Low Thermal Connector A24 Thermocouple Connector 7 1 Section VL SERVICE GROUP Model 3495A 7 B 1 The low thermal decade options are ten to one multiplexers The scanner assem blies in these options are the AS Display Assembly A10 Logic Assembly A13 Channel Assembly and Al4 or A24 terminal connector Typical uses of low thermal options include ohms scanning voltage scanning and thermocouple temperature measurements 7 B 2 The A24 reference connector assembly in option 003 replaces the terminal assem bly of option 001 The reference connector provides an isothermal environment and a thermistor tied to channel 0 The thermist
169. SN74LS259N 4007 1820 1201 2 TTL LS AND QUAD 2 INP 01698 lt 741508 4008 10 1820 1195 5 IC FF TTL LSD TYPE 01698 SN74LS175N A40U11 1820 0577 1 TTL HEX I INP 01698 SN7416N A40U12 1820 1195 IC FF TTL LS D TYPE 01698 SN74LS175N 440113 1820 1201 TTL LS AND QUAD 2 INP 01698 SN74LSOSN A40U14 1820 1204 1 IC GATE TTLLS 01698 SN74LS20N 40015 1820 1212 1 TTL LS J K NEG EDGE TRIG 01698 SN74LST12N A4QU16 1820 1437 1 IC MU TTL LS MONOSTBL DUAL 01698 SN74LS221N A40U17 1820 1208 1 DUAL 4 0 01698 SN7A4LS32N A40U18 1820 1415 1 ICSCHMITT TRIG TTL LS 01698 SN74LS13N EX E 7 D 10 ta ASH BART POIS AGE Lin As HABA 0 J100Usaiqno E ont JHASHIg 20012 8 did OLN 5 OLA 20010314 SAA e 129285 ON sss4ppw z 4 4 SHA of en eat E i uid 1281101 5 Zin 32581955 5540184815 25541 4 3294109 sain1eub s 601040000 t Utd 59 Enta pnan L uid BEd BOOP 9 uld 6154 8900 E uid zin 5 0000 BE Ule en a 0000 Li Did 153917124015 INOA 1 samigufis 00090 01 Vid 4 entd 0900 8 uid SBA GONE 0006 te SAES O td 129 407
170. SSY 4 835534 Hj SUV L LUVL py svepa OP WL 310314 1 0102 08 3iviS LON t 1 ava D A SNE tv V A TSS i 2v WO ee gt Ey 1 8 61 168 i i i E i TX 1 5209030 SESE ME ME oem p d i 1 NO PI oe i a 49019 navi E i E E NOVIA 1 N3A3S TE 1 14 di ud 1 309930 8 i 30v930 2 amp t 7 7 Gs Qn B o ee lt a irn Gr va 2 i i 304739 4 lt Ho epe m n mM 20v030 e 3uOlS SAM 4 a E TEM 2 6l 72 ines 1 309230 m Mon 1 432072 WIS Mes UES AIE RM zb 71 0437 di dd 041403 ne IN3W3OVNVIN 399090 gg ug 1 y 103135 Ju
171. Scanner Offset Voltage 34954 Static Dynamic Voltmeter Accuracy 3455A Thermocouple Tabla Conformity Thermocouple Calibration 3 125 WIRING CONCERNS 3 126 Care should be taken when connecting thermo couple wires to the reference connector terminals Bare wire lengths should be kept to a minimum to avoid shorting input connections The reference connector attaches to the low thermal channel assembly Check to be sure that the low thermal assembly is securely in its slot on the scanner chassis To limit heat transfer along wires use 18 AWG wires or thinner The specifications are also a function of this restruction 3 127 GUARD CONCEPTS 3 128 Proper system operation when taking measurements with the system DVM s can only be obtained when the are guarded correctly A guarded instrument has an additional shield termed the guard between the low and ground effectively increasing the low to ground leakage impedance With the guard properly connected it shunts common mode currents away from the source resistances This current shunt then can virtually eliminate common mode current errors in the instrument measurement This principle is illustrated for the 3495A in Figure 3 18 For more information on guarding refer to hp Application Note 123 Floating Measurements and Guarding 3 129 GUARDING IN TEMPERATURE MEASURE MENTS 3 130 The thermocouple terminal connectors provide guard terminals for all sets
172. TCHING ANS 30V SOMA 28480 1401 0040 46050 059 1990 0419 io LEO VISIBLE 28480 1990 0419 69510 1990 0436 DISPLAY NUM SEG 1 CHAR 3 IN HIGH 239480 1990 0434 AGRO 068074315 10 RESISTOR 430 GHA 5X 5 CC TUBULAR 01121 ER4315 AGRI 0686 6315 RESISTOR 430 5 5W CC TUBULAR 01121 684315 AKR 0686 4315 RESISTOR 430 5 5 CC TUBULAR 01121 84315 AGR3 0686 4315 RESISTOR 430 OHM 5 58 CC TUBULAR 01121 6315 0686 4315 RESISTOR 430 OHR 5X 5 CC TUBULAR 01121 4315 AGR 0686 4315 RESISTOR 430 OHM 5 5W CC TUBULAR 01121 EB4315 AGRO 0686 4315 RESISTOR 430 5 5 CC TUBUL AR 01121 EB4215 0686 4315 RESISTOR 430 OHM 5 5 TUBULAR 01121 4315 AGR 8 9586 4315 RESISTOR 430 5 59 TUBULAR 01121 84315 AGR Y 0686 4315 RESISTOR 430 5 SW CC TUBULAR 91121 EB4315 6810 0683 7515 RESISTOR 750 OHM 5 25H CC TUBULAR 01121 287515 ABR AL 0683 7515 RESISTOR 750 5 25W CC TUBULAR 91121 87 lt 15 A6812 0883 7516 RESISTOR 750 5 25W CC TUBULAR 01121 CB7515 A6R13 0683 7515 RESISTOR 750 OHH 5 25W TUBULAR 01121 C81515 AGRI 0683 1515 RESISTOR 750 OHM 5 258 CC TUBULAR 01121 C87515 A6R15 0683 1515 RESISTOR 750 OHM 5 25 CC TUBULAR 01121 87515 AGR 15 9683 1515 RESISTOR 750 5 25WN TUBULAR 01121 87515 AGUE 1820 1233 fC DOIL SNT4L 47 N DECODER 01295 SA 74L 4 FH 6 MISCELLANEOUS 93495 87701 ANNUNCIATOR MASK 28480 03495 87701 03495 81102 ANNUNCIATOR
173. U9UloJ09p UOUIOIOUI 01 ay sosneo 19 49 0 4814 yoga oou uononnsuf ue jo 10 9 yay ms dtp vo umg USM LND st peux pl ME ZEN LN3IISHONI TVNH31X3 EL3 ON 10 Sunueurjdun pue jueurerour Ama eu SUIZHETHU 10 posn st siu SNQ ejep 9U 0 pue 1 09351 JUQUINIJSUT eu 2788 0 Sq 054 184818 309125 9049P SUL 1 3 1 5575 0 13NNYHO 1X3N 139 53018 DAISSI8400V VIVO INdN LES 3GOW ova 11 HI dH 941 1840 SUIAI9291 NOINA 11v 32UTIVIELINI souanbas 510 oijuoo seul 1934p l ssoooidou gN Zurunusis 153738 Old di 4H 212997 9059 ul DOJEIISNITI SI o2uonbos oxeuspueu ORAL JANNYHO _ B li Thy 39018 IAVHSONVH amp 34 312 are 340 JO BV C3HONI J NO H3MOd 7 E 4 Mndel 3495 increment circuitry is enabled and the nanoprocessor is not currently in an in
174. WITCH 4 p im RUN T asane E 4444 send 4444 t 242 eso gt u Rs ESECLHTE RG npe T SHYITEES i TREK te Ple is I EwEDIU nm m I pol y dee t Mat 1 d 56 et ve dans j t E 444 p qa ques tagia au h zo ine 1 PEM SHMITCES THECL GI PETTI IIT TH uU d t 4 LEE t 1 t 1 E m 114 ah t in hmi err dr t n Fees aaa 2 inh 3 gt t us PH aas P pe quads p 444 LLL 44 1 pops gue D 4 ye i e E Inn 4 4 441 a nad 4 qs de p 4 VE 4 Lai 1 D dns Seer uns C jn 1 den un 1 E 4544 1 das 42001 jm F 1444 1 m qo eaa a m8 m og mi 4 T 1 i 1 gt 44 4 dy 2 4 4 Xp 144 tear de Ff de teat PQ oh 1 p 0 Pat 4 a Jans jos 1 sr ir Er ul s derer 4 ee ila 1 B P rr WHEN READY
175. a npaooag 1521 VS Oja 599 1 ERREZ i Or VSBPE ON 15 UDUMS YS er utBag S ON OMG 403185 WS arg AG DL a49 2 1841262 von end uon wal ig sa AARE UOH SRAC OVEN Z ff eraedoad 4 SIUBUOMLUOTD pars Edi 23 Fin and ee iuasalg 3909488191911 HO JODUSAQNOS ON X901 arte 217 GHO iS yomg vado Anmnoso Seg OS 44 BIELE 911803 BUG 194 SY area datt 425 Jad SV d eui 204 ON 9 ls 5 dig 92243 328403 6 r m ele N c34 21M 124 405 6 556334 90 9niBA 304 BE uid Sig Peg ABU 5 dji gole Edil iv ZMYDE lt 205 BZ Wd ZIN AeL 197121910 N38u2 er uBnosui YS uedo 103 4107 sedas sonen Addrs WOW 304 ZF LT 385 WOW saj dng WOH 288
176. ach service group is a self sufficient service section on a particular set of scanner assemblies options acces Figure 1 4 Field Installable Low Thermal Duo Decade Model 3495 Figure 1 6 Field Installable High Speed Controller 100 x Qe g mM a 9 9 558 i 5 552888288 2333355 cien noo Ss OE I 2 2 HO Meee OE NO E ee ee White Gioves 8650 0018 5 002 D ion 10001 Opt 44195 10002 rroiler Board 44195 Fr m Con 03495 66522 Sheet Metat 90000 t 44195 j Decade SILICON SR a CRANE lt E Figure 1 5 Field installable Thermocouple Duo Reference Junction Assembly Section Controller Board Operating Nate Service 44095 90001 Accessory Box 1540 0015 93495 66510 Power Supply Assy 03495 66502 Figure 1 7 Service Kit Test K ing Note Oberat Low Thermai Test Fixture 03495 67901 Fixture Cabie Assy 93495 61605 1 8 Model 3495 141 COMPLETING THE LOOP 1 42 More information on available parts documentation hp Support Document 44401 90000 44404 90000 44405 90000 44413 90000 44095 90002 44195 90000 P 03495 64103 1B Operating Note for hp 3495A Options 001 002 amp Accessories 44401A 44402 A 44403 90002 Ope
177. across the DC NULL VOLTMETER inputs c Zero the DC NULL VOLTMETER on the 3 micro volt range 4 increment the SCANNER to the channel to be tested e Remove the shorting strap from the DC NULL VOLTMETER Record the measurement on the performance test card at the end of this section g Repeat Steps b through f for all channels to be tested The actuator channe measurements require rewiring the connector for each channel measured unless common connections are wired as in Figure 4 1 4 4 4 24 a The following specifications are verified in this test Opt 001 amp 003 Opt 004 amp 005 gt 101 y gt 107 0 These are strictly resistive quantities 4 25 Description 4 26 This test verifies that the isolation resistance on option channels is within the specified range The test requires a high resistance meter since gt 1019 or gt 107 ohm measurements are expected There are three isolation resis tances which can be tested They are High to Low High to Guard Low to Guard as determined by the Select Switches 51 and 52 in Figure 4 6 Model 3495 Section DC NULL VOLTMETER hp 419A REFER TO FIGURE 4 1 FOR WIRING DIAGRAMS CHANNEL SCANNER INCREMENT hp 3495 SWITCH INC IN Figure 4 4 Thermal Offset Voltage Setup 4 27 Test Procedure b Wire the Option Connector as shown in Figure 4 5 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED c Ins
178. acter on the and perform accordingly this happens when the 3495 is in the Ready mode and of the NRFD Enable signals goes true The 3495A is in the Ready mode if the HP IB control signal is false FC and either the HP IB is in the Command ATN mode or the 34954 is presently addressed to listen ADR 7 28 NRFD Enable I is true when the is in the ATN mode and a non address command D6 e D7 has just been received and the Conditional Bus Hold CBH signal is true CBH goes true when Clock L goes high at U17 9 after a valid command SDC DCL GET is received in state 30 20 or 10 and drives U4D 10 low it is then held true outside of state 30 20 or 10 by ROM U15 at U4D 9 The D6 e D7 term goes false at the Data Clear signal after state 30 20 or 10 this overrides CBH and allows commands including addresses to be sent on the while the state machine is being clocked back to state 30 7 A 29 NRFD Enable is true when the HP IB is in the Data mode and the 3495 is presently addressed to listen ADR and the CBH signal is true CBH is true when the state machine is not in state 30 20 or 10 but it may be overridden by unaddressing the 3495A so that instructions can be sent to other HP IB listeners while the 3495A is outside of state 30 20 or 10 The must be put in the Command mode to unaddress the 3495A and then be put in the Data mode to send messages to ot
179. al channels is possible by interconnecting five 3495A s at the rear panels and positioning internal jumper wires Software can assure a like situation for all 560 channels 1 15 The Actuator decade option relays have two sets of normally open contacts with four terminals per channel Any number of channels may be closed simultaneously as needed for power or signal distribution control functions etc 1 16 The Thermocouple decade option is similar to the Low Thermal decade option except that a thermocouple reference connector s substituted for the terminal con nector Nine multiplexed temperature measurements can be made per option Channel 0 on each connector is reserved for a reference temperature monitoring thermistor 1 1 Section I 1 17 The low thermal duo decade options are 20 to 1 multiplexers allowing 20 signals 42 to be moni tored by one measurement instrument A scanner loaded with four duo decade options has 80 programmable channels 1 18 The thermocouple duo decade option is similar to the low thermal duo decade option except that channel O on each connector is reserved for a reference temperature monitoring resistor 1 19 Both duo decade options are capable of a switching speed up to 1000 channels per second when used as the sole options in the 3495A Scanner or when slower options have no clear addresses 3495 1 20 The high speed controller option replaces the standard interface an
180. annels Close Troubleshoot ROM Sec tion Via Flowchart Page _4 5 Suspect and 010 Is 018 Pin 14 High Check inputs to 018 Com parator Do inputs Correspond Check Inputs To 06 And Do Inputs Correspond f Suspect U6 012 Oniy A Few Decades Work Check U17 Ten s Storage Flip Flops 022 is 019 2 High Check Atns Line Logic Check The States Of DS And 27 IL Check HP IB Connector Missing individual Chan neis On Any Decade Check Data Storage Flip Fiops UG and U12 Figure 7 A 7 3495A A4 Assembly Troubleshooting Tree 7 A 14 SERVIFE ARAHP A 46 2 15 1119 Pin 6 Low MIO OPP Check U1 U3 020 ART DAN A Model 3495 Reference Designation AREA 442 A4T 3 ASC 665 4 6 ASC AS AR LO A amp E 14 ARE 12 A4C14 thru CT7 A4Q1 AGRI AGR AGRI AGRA AARS AARG ARR 4488 BERG amp 4SRiG A4R11 AGRIZ 44213 A4814 ARIS ASU E 2 43 ASUS 506 A41 4448 24U9 84910 AGULI 4013 ASU AS amp 4U 15 4016 416 ASULG ASu20 443214 4422 SERVICE GROUP A Table 7 A 3 Replaceable Parts Interface and Control A4 7 0349 5 66504 03495 69564 0180 1743 0150 0093 0150 0093 0150 0093 0150 0093 0150 0093 0159 0093 0180 1701 0
181. as follows Duo Decade Address Blocks 00 19 20 39 40 59 60 79 3 35 duo decade address sensitizes duo decade to respond to a block of twenty channel programming instruc tions The close response is the closure of the desired relay s in the selected block or blocks The open response is the opening of all relays in the selected block or blocks twenty per open address The following examples illustrate the switch positions resulting close and open addresses and channel response to instructions SWITCH POSITIONS SWITCHES SHOWN ARE CLOSED g ON ban AN SO i 16 de Qu CHANNEL ACTIVITY The channel s on this duo decade will close on channel instructions of 00 through 19 Channel instructions for other duo decades will NOT affect the channels on this duo decade 3 3 OOCCUO 111 DECADE DECADE DECADE DECADE ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS ABDRESS 2 1 3 cHNL 10 20 DECADE DECADE DECADE DECADE ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 0 9 0 M A CHANNEL 1 LCHNL 10 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 9 DECADE DECADE DECADE DECADE ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 2 2 7 mcn d CHANNEL 20 CHANNEL 21 L CHANNEL 22 ES 28 HNL 78 Model 3495A DECADE DECADE DECADE DECADE
182. ate exceeding this must be used to make measurements at this speed such as the hp Model 34374 3 19 The high speed capability of the duo decade options combined with increased channel capacity make duo 3 1 Section decade options well suited for multi channel burst measure ments and other high speed applications 3 20 HARDWARE PROGRAMMING 3 21 Optimizing the 3495A Scanner for a particular application is accomplished through a series of three hard ware programming features a The physical selection of channel hookups on the ter minal assemblies b The selection of decade and duo decade open close and clear addresses by positioning internal jumper wires c The selection of the 3495 A s Listen Address on the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus by positioning internal jumper wires 3 22 CHANNEL HOOKUP 3 23 In some applications the proper selection of chan nels may reduce the amount of software needed for data manipulation If the physical space or sequential time relationships between measurements are important assign channels with this in mind 3 24 The most obvious way of selecting channel hookups is to assign measurements which are adjacent physically or sequentially to adjacent 3495 A channels This duplicates the relationship between measurements 3 25 DECADE ADDRESSES Options 001 002 003 NOTE The terms clear and open have near equiv alent meanings in this manual Cl
183. avior is away from the block the first increment an ASCH S in the data mode or a negative transition at the external increment input at J5 with the external increment software enabled Il model jumps to the first channel 3 81 An ASCII in the data mode immediately incre ments a channel and executes accumulated instructions in a line The software increment capability of the A8 inter face and control assembly cannot be disabled 3 82 The external increment capability of the 8 inter face and control board is enabled by an ASCII I1 and disabled by an ASCII 19 3 83 and L are initialized to 00 and 79 respectively during a power up condition after the SDC or DCL com mands or after the instruction In addition a power up condition initializes the external increment capability as determined by dip switch six 6 A closed switch enables the external increment capability upon turn on This is the factory set position 3 84 Instruction Formatting 3 85 The basic format for a channel close instruction is ien MM Ty Ur BU Ta Ug E Where T Tens channel digit decade select U Units channel digit channel select E Execute or Carriage Return CR Instruction field shaded For example the instruction Will close channels 07 and 35 if the decade clear addresses are not 0 or 3 Model 3495 3 86 The following rules govern formatting instructions in ways other than the
184. b lem is with the HP IB b Connect only the 3495A under test to the controller via a single HP IB Cable Then rerun the Verification Chuck ie recable NOTE This will help to determine the possibility of another instrument or cable malfunctioning and creating a problem with the instrument under test c Failure of the check in Step a indicates a possible malfunctioning of the Cable HP IB 1 0 Card or the Controller Replace the HP IB Cable and rerun the Verification Check for the original under test If a com ponent or instrument is malfunctioning or if the problem cannot be isolated contact your local hp Field Office for assistance NOTE It is helpful to jot down each of the things you have done to determine the problem This pre vents repeating something already done 1 All instruments ON and power applied 2 Cassette transport door closed 3 Printer has paper 4 Talk and Listen addresses used by program same as instrument under test 5 HP IB cable connectors completely free of all foreign material Number Common Area i Special Function Keys Ipsi 3495A Scanner Verification 3495A Troubleshooting indicates Blank File 6 HP IB cables securely connected 7 No more than two 2 meters HP IB cable per device in the test set up 7 50 Scanner Test Fixture Theory of Operation 7 51 The scanner test fixture serves two functions a Selection of the ree
185. ce contact your nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office Addresses are provided at the back of this manual Model 3495 TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page I GENERAL INFORMATION 1 1 Li OR Verr 1 1 1 3 Instruments Covered by 1 1 16 Manual Changes 2 caus so ee eae ER 1 1 1 10 Safety 1 1 1 1 12 Description naar Ee 1 1 15212 BDECIICAHONS 1 2 1 24 Supplemental Characteristics 1 5 1526 OPUS 1 6 1 28 Accessories Available 1 6 1 34 Manual Structure esce Re 1 7 1 41 Completing the Loop 1 9 1 10 Section Page I INSTALLATION rs 2 1 2 L Initial Inspection vv sr E bs REC 2 1 2 3 PowerRe guiements 2 1 2 5 Power Cords and Receptacles 2 1 2 7 Grounding Requirements 2 1 2 11 Environmental Requirements 2 1 2xE3 alone 2 1 2 14 aa 2 1 2 16 Rack DEA 2 1 2 18 installation of Options 2 1 2 22 Wiring the A14 Terminal Assembly 2 2 2 26 Wiring the A23 Terminal Assembly 2 3 2 30 Wiring the A24 Thermocouple Reference 2 3 2 33 Wiring the A45 and A46 Terminal CORECOR c sou dox o he 2 3 2 36 Interface Connection 2 5 2 40 Repackaging for Shipment 2 6 Section Page IH OP
186. ch 7 initiates the SA test routine upon turn on 7 E 7 Information in this service group is presented as follows Fast Controller Theory of Operation b Signature Analysis Tests Service Material 7 8 Refer to the 8 block diagram in Figure 7 2 INTERRUPT CONTROL LINES TURN ON EXTERNAL INCREMENT CIRCUITRY HANDSHAKE 052 DSI INPUT DATA N 10 0102 E ADDRESSING 0101 5108 TP TEST POINT DS DEVICE SELECT LINES Figure 7 E 2 A8 Block Diagram CHANNEL ro SELE 7 EXECUTE Model 3495A a NTR cal cto OR REN EE DENE ee CAL 4849014 WOH 1043409 5 3 9 202222 DC RENS 4 ee oupnol pue oouenbos oy 099 1 555 2014 ou ETAL 108813 juenbasqus uo 10 31 PUB H saposap 105522014 SS ougu oy UB sem 9U SHSHLO 3 193 ONV_Y3Hdl930 A SUIPIOsOR pojnooxo are 12430 souenbas oy pue oxeuspuegu SUrzITEBIUIO 3 nse1 SPURUNUOS OSAJ pue ieo o IAAP pojooos 10 18 10 32942 105590010 oueu 24 pueuiuoo eu Ul 1 4
187. cks following the Operating instructions 3 Guard reeds LOW THERMAL only O Finished testing NOTE b Controller displays FIRST CHANNEL TO 2 BE TESTED or LAST CHANNEL TO BE To repeat the Scanner Verification Program for TESTED p gram f the same decade assembly just press f pe 7 Remove the Test Fixture and replace with the appropriate Terminal Assembly The system is now ready to resume normal operations The operator should respond with the specific channel number The assemblies are numbered 0 9 10 19 etc beginning with the far right assembly as you look at the rear of the instrument The channel number input should be limited to those channels available on the decade assembly 7 65 DEFINITIONS OF PROGRAM VARIABLES under test 7 66 The 3495A Scanner Operational Verification Check Channel Number uses numerous variables when running the program The 7 18 Model 3495 variable definition and line location of the variable are shown below A Error flag when set to I indicates a resistive relay B Stores first channel number to be tested operator defined Current channel number under test D Current REED Test operator defined E Error flag when set to 717 indicates a shorted relay J Channel counter for Scanner Troubleshooting Subroutine Stores current channel number for Scanner Troubleshooting Subroutine M Stores value of DVM reading R Contains intermediat
188. close timer interval 7 D 31 The open timer interval lasts approximately 22 milliseconds When OT goes low the DC signal held at U13B is gated to the UI6A close timer implementing the close timer CT interval At this point the CT signal performs the following a Clocks data through the U12 unit s digit flip flop b Generates the closing flag CF signal to the controller assembly c Clears the U15B decade open flip flop d Reduces base drive on the Q2 steady state relay coil drive current source reduces steady state power demands 7 D 32 OT remains low and CT remains high until another DC or DO signal and an cute are present 7 D 33 Upon an OPEN address Ul4A sets the decade open signal high This signal or a clear signal sets the U9 unit s storage flip flop This creates an invalid digit code which is derived by U17C This signal is later used to blank the displays Model 3495A Sr sdiusuonejeg Oy z Q z anity 9v 13 ONINAdO ONISOTO NadQ 6 AIAL NadO Pa al je BOLINOW Ti 4 IN3UUND 134 eulis Aq sdo ANJ 288105 oq Ojui ST 95070 FOUUBLO PERA Y SMO JO se St souenbos 9Xnsopo e o1 sdrgsuons or Surum a l 01 1219 Ey UL 32N30035 3915012 Zr jueum1 sur jueuro1nseoul
189. crystal HEE Pa a a A ies OIE a IRA Ya re network 6 1 Section VI 6 2 Table 6 2 Code List of Manufacturers Manufacturer Name Address 00000 U S A Common Any Supplier of U S A 00779 Amp inc Harrisburg PA 17105 01121 Bradiey Co Milwaukee WE 53212 01295 Texas Instr Inc Semicond Div Dallas TX 75237 04713 Motorola Semiconductor Products Phoenix AZ 85008 06540 Amatom Elec Hardware Div of Mite New Rochelle NY 10802 07263 Fairchild Semiconductor Div Mountain View CA 94040 16299 Corning Gl Wk Elec Cmpnt Div Raleigh 27604 22526 Berg Electronic inc Cumberland PA 17070 24546 Corning Glassworks Bradford 16701 27014 National Semiconductor Corp Santa Clara CA 95051 27264 Molex Products Co Downers Grove IL 60515 28480 Hewlett Packard Co Corporate HO Palo Aito CA 94304 32997 Bourns Inc Trimpot Prod Div Miverside 92507 56289 Sprague Electric Co North Adams MA 01247 59730 Thomas amp Betts Co THE Elizabeth NJ 07207 71785 TRW Elek Components Cinch Div Elk Grove Viltage IL 60007 75042 TRW inc Philadelphia Div Philadelphia PA 19108 90201 Mallory Capacitor Co Indianapolis 46206 Table 6 3 Replaceable Assemblies Description Service Group Assembly hp PartNo 03495 66501 03495 66524 03495 66503 03495 66504 03495 66507
190. ct vatues for pins 9 15 The correct signatures are 9 15 4P4F a These signatures should also be changed if the first block on Page B 7 t9 Figure 7 4 The location of should be changed and 412 added as shown B below ASR26 should be labeled 100 0 not 499 Q The padding List far R29 should have the 5 V and 2 V i numbers changed both on the schematic and in the parts list to be 5 20K 0757 0449 2 649 0698 4460
191. ction VII SECTION VII SERVICE 7 1 THE SERVICE GROUP CONCEPT 7 2 This section of the manual is organized to streamline service procedures on the 3495 A Scanner The material is divided into service Groups Bach Service Group contains the following information a Cover Page Describes which options and assemblies are covered in the Service Group This page is illustrated with a block diagram showing the assembly functions b Introduction Describes and outlines the Service Group c Theory Describes the Theory of Operation of all assemblies in the Service Group d Troubleshooting Includes checks and conceptual troubleshooting when flowcharts are not practical e Service Material Each schematic is preceded by 1 Block Diagram 2 Troubleshooting Tree 3 Replaceable Parts List 4 Component Locator 7 3 All necessary information for servicing a particular service group is located in the Service Group If a revision is made to any part of a Service Group the entire service group is revised and the old service group can be used as backdating material 7 4 SAFETY 7 5 Take extreme care when servicing the 3495A terminal connectors when using channels for power control or when connected to potentially live circuits WARNING Remove power from all external circuits con nected to the 34954 terminal connectors before beginning any service routines We also suggest disconnecting th
192. d GHUUFPD MOdel S493 3495A Assembly No Relays Close And No Display Digits Light Check U11 And 112 And Their Clock And Clear Lines From The Close And Clear Address Gates Check The Decade Enable Flip Flop Check Relay State Control Logic Check 08 Guard Relay Control Check Clock Hz At TP 221 kHz if Not Suspect 5 Sure That Close And i Clear Address Jumpers Are Not The Display is Functioning But Relays Close But No Dis Some Relays Not Close play Check U4C Display Blank And 113 Ten s Display Control Suspect U7 Check the Relays Occurs Only With Channel Closure For Appropriate Decade Address Example 9830 Program For Decade Zero 10 CMD U 20 Output 13 Q QE 30 END Example 9825 Program For Decade Zero 10 7 201 DOE 20 end Figure 7 4 Low Thermal Decades Troubleshooting Tree A FR ITLL EFER ts 34 Model 3495 SERVICE GROUP Section Table 7 5 1 Replaceable Parts A10 Low Thermal Logic Mfr Heference ati BE eer Code Designation ar Number Mfr Part Number Aid 0349 5 66510 thru 4 LOW THERMAL 0610 ASSY 03455 66510 ALOCI 01602 95 l GAPACITUR FXOU OlUF 60 203 z5WHVDC 6itt 2964 A1002 0160 2964 OLUF 80 20 25 9 CER 9155 29
193. d control assembly with a high speed unit The 8 version can control channel switching at the maximum logic assembly rates through provisions for software controlled and external increment decrement 1 21 SPECIFICATIONS 1 22 Specifications are performance characteristics which are warranted Table 1 1 lists the specifications for the hp Model 3495A Scanner These specifications supersede all others Any changes in specifications due to manufacturing or design changes are included in Table 1 1 These specifica tions apply to a fully covered scanner with properly installed options and accessories with the rear 3495A door closed Table 1 1 Specifications Option 001 Accessory 44401A 10 Channel Low Thermal Relay Assembly Decade Type Three pole low thermal dry reed relays per channel Third pole switches guard and is not low thermal Break before make operation with partially sequenced closure Guard closes before iow high relays close Guard opens after low and high relays open Maximum Contact Ratings Voltage 200 V peak Current 200 mA non inductive Power 2 VA Maximum Input Voltages Between any two terminals 230 V peak Guard to chassis 200 V peak Guard to tow 200 V peak Thermal Offset lt 2 uV differential EMF Isolation gt 101 0 between high low guard Switching Time 10 msec maximum Option 002 Accessory 44402 10 Channel Relay Actuator Assembly Decade Type Two pole armature r
194. d test to be run either Low High or Guard for Low Thermal Assemblies or A or B for Activa tor Assemblies b Isolation of shorted relays Refer to the schematic of the scanner test fixture shown in Figure 7 3 for the following discussion 7 52 When the Scanner Test Program is being run all switches in the 10 position channel selector switches should be closed The Reed Selector switch corresponding to the reed test to be run is closed the other two switches are open 7 53 The Scanner Test Program first opens clears all relays in the scanner If any relay of the reed type being tested is shorted the 3490A DVM will read a short Since the relays of all the channels in the decade are connected in parallel it is only possible to say that one of the relays of the reed type under test is shorted To determine which relay is shorted the Scanner Troubleshooting Program must be run 7 54 The Scanner Troubleshooting Program instructs the operator to begin opening channel selector switches sequen tially When the channel selector switch for the shorted relay is opened the 3490A DVM will read an open and the channel number of the defective relay is printed out The defective relay will be the last one removed from the circuit before the DVM read an open NULO V RE 3495A or HIGH A or LOW GUARD d or HIGH FIXTURE CHANNEL 0 Model 3495A CHANNEL SELECTOR SWITCHES POSIT
195. dantly occurs in states 03 and 04 to increase its duration This is the signal that enables the Relay State Machine on the A10 and A20 Logic assem blies to close and open the channel relays The number of relays that are closed depends upon the number of passes through Control State 11 the address configuration of the options and the mixture of options 7 A 56 Data Clear Signal 7 A 57 Data Clear signal occurs after each data input character except no operator is received on a handshake cycle By resetting the Data Storage flip flops after each hand shake cycle a operator data code is present the next time the state machine arrives at state 30 20 or 10 The ASCII character DEL at U6 U12 gives a operator Data Next State code at ROM U14 and holds the state machine in state 30 20 or 10 until a talker can put a new character on the 7 58 SERVICE MATERIAL 7 A 59 The following pages include service material for the A4 interface and control assembly Included is a troubleshooting tree a replaceable parts list an A4 component locator an A4 block diagram and a schematic of the A4 interface and control assembly Section VII 7 13 Tu Hon 4 1 W Wa oU SECTION 3495 A4 Assembly Pin 6 Power gt Check Clock At TP12 Listen Can Channels Be Open ed And Closed Normally No Ch
196. decade addressing schemes Example A Logic assembly may have a Close address of 0 and 1 and a second Logic assem bly a Close address of 0 and a Clear address of 1 When channel number 05 is programmed and executed channel 5 closes on both Logic assemblies but when channel number 15 is pro grammed and executed channel 5 closes on the first Logic assembly and all channels open on the second Logic assembly 3 31 A pair of 3495A s with decade options only can be hardware programmed to act as one unit by assigning Close addresses of O through 3 to one scanner and 4 through 7 to the other If both scanners have the same Listen address they act as one 80 channel scanner 3 32 Up to five 3495A s loaded with low thermal decades can be connected to act as a maximum 200 to 1 multi section Lil plexer This can be done as follows Assign each 3495A pair the same Listen address b Assign the remaining 3495 a unique Listen address c Connect the Common terminals of ali 20 decades d Assign decade Close addresses of 0 through 8 to each scanner pair e Assign each decade seven Clear addresses not corres ponding to its Close address f Connect the SYNC jacks of each scanner 3 33 DUO DECADE ADDRESSES Options 004 005 3 34 Close and Open addresses for channel duo decades are set on the duo decade logic assembly 8 switch DIP S1 can be positioned to provide any combination of close or open addresses
197. developing an algorithm prior to writing actual programs 3 57 The procedure for controlling the scanner can be stated as a number of well defined steps Once the steps are known programs for almost any controller can be written 3 58 Defining the Steps 3 59 The Scanner s entire set of programmable capabilities can be summarized as follows a Clear Clear open all channels clear instructions sent AND executed b Close Close one or more channels close instructions sent AND executed Trigger Execute previously received instructions With Option 106 4 STEP Increments or decrements dependent on prior FIRST and LAST channel programming instructions and executes the present channel programming instruction The channels cycled through and the increment versus decre ment behavior are programmable The step can be per formed by software or an externally applied increment signal Therefore any step in a Scanner algorithm must perform one or more of these four functions 3 60 Program Example A program is needed to perform the following a Close only channels 21 and 31 b Change to channels 22 and 32 on a later command c Increment through channels 33 to 36 An algorithm to accomplish this would be d Clear the Scanner Close channels 21 and 31 f Send to the Scanner the clear instruction and the close channel 22 and 32 instructions 8 Trigger the Scanner to execute the previous instruc
198. dures on these boards can leave them contaminated with dirt oil solder flux or finger prints 7 73 Recovering the original impedance qualities con taminated board requires a thorough board cleaning and recoating process The following method can be used for cleaning PC boards and then recoating the repaired area on the board with a dry film coating a Items needed are 1 Conventional dishwasher 2 Detergent one of the following a Triton CF 54 or CF 76 low foam industrial liquid detergent available in 5 gallon 45 lb containers from Central Solvents 31702 Hayman Street Hayward CA 94544 NOTE The Triton products are low foaming and non ionic For this application use a dilution factor of 0 1 54 is more general purpose whereas CF 76 is recommended only for dishwashers b Alco Zyme Enzyme Detergent This is a deter gent used in hospitals to clean surgical tools Available from Scientific Products 150 Jefferson Drive Menlo Park CA 94025 NOTE Alco Zyme is a recommended second choice but be careful it is a high foaming detergent If you use too much in the dishwasher you could be inundated with a mountain of suds Calgonite dishwasher detergent if none of the above are available NOTE The problem with Calgonite is that if improper ly rinsed from the PC board it can leave an electrically conductive film especially in hard to rinse areas like relays 3 Distilled water
199. e Addressing Wrong Decade Check to see that the Operator input of the channel number during the Verifica tion Check corresponds to the decade under test f Talk and Listen addresses incorrect Refer to the System Configuration Sheet to insure the address of the instruments used in the Verification Check corresponds to those used in the program 7 47 Operator Troubleshooting 7 48 The following paragraphs cover general operator troubleshooting hints and procedures for the operator to perform when the verification program stops or hangs up during execution The procedures are given in a suggested order of performance 7 49 Troubleshooting Hints and Procedures Follow Steps a through c paying attention to the seven troubleshooting hints that follow a If the controller or 3495A under test does not respond after approximately 1 minute during program execution the system has become hung up it has stopped on some program line and will not advance any further To regain control of the controller press STOP A line number will appear on the display To see the program line that the controller has stopped on press mam Line Number ma PM m If you have modified the verification program for another address or for some other reason the program may then be SUBIO DION 0 20 1 inc 0011 2034153439 Of ION 38V 0501 0809
200. e 2135129306120 1960 Teuniay MO SI 329119 feIsAO spputuno IUP oinje1odiuo ay SUID peog 12 Aojdure serquiesse 1OJOSUUOD PUR SPY 6E C L 1975191 BOY 5155842 BUST ET pue 284 CCW SHOD oy 19jsue1 eq 9 81893 Sune nsur V SPIBOG peppe IsAef Hinu 4810241 s e ei sjoejuoo UOOMIIG savua pp 19 azrumunu oj SEM pieoq 85 2 SNOLLVH3OISNO2 TINNVHO 78 04 61 udnonp y pue 9 0 jo 5 19 ur SI SUIpODA JUOMI FO DUO ST 309195 QEL 06318 Suppue q se 398 03 1 3 12413 uedo ou Suuup 943 01 pored s 61815 189 10 uado ay 4 P9189109 peusis 3181 pi pAUut SEL 0 2 snp UI pejueure duut 100 ST TEAIOJUT 12413 250 9U sni pue yussoid jou St 120815 YA sy 1841 ssaippe opeoop Aq Jey SI uo 9193 WoL oouonbos eaa LO uodo 2085 oyndexa AQ goin eui 01 pole sr 16085 SUL
201. e Office 441 442 PC assemblies require clean handling techniques Use gloves when servicing these assemblies to avoid degrading channel impedances K8 K4 00000000000000000000000000000000 o00000000000000000000000000000000 Figure 7 D 3 A42 Relay Connection Guide 7 D 6 Model 2499 A AIN Ns 61 7141 Y EH 7 D 46 Replacing the relay board is advised to insure proper low thermal operation and reed life The coils may be replaced without affecting low thermal operation Part numbers for these components and boards are in the replaceable parts list of this service group 7 D 47 Plated through holes are available on the A42 relay assembly for use in monitor ing the relay connections or for permanent connection of measurement wires The loca tion and assignment of these holes is shown in Figure 7 D 3 7 D 48 The reed and coil channel assignments are etched onto the A41 and A42 assem blies to aid in reed and coil replacement NOTE Here again reed replacement is advised at a board level 7 0 49 SERVICE MATERIAL 7 D 50 The following pages contain service material for the duo decade assemblies Included is an 40 Troubleshooting Tree Figure 7 D 4 SA Test Procedure Flowchart Figure 7 D 5 an A40 component locator Figure 7 D 6 an 40 block diagram Figure 7 D 7 replaceable parts lists Tables 7 D 1 and 7 D 2 and schematics Figures 7 D 8 and 7 D 9 Check
202. e SI 91915 OCV 9YL 60L 3018 31915 AVi3H 891 2 18 Aejds p syuerq ou fo 8 ay JO suado JO 9poo paip PITEAUI o paap ore sdoy dyy 2981035 sun ey asduinf 8891 104 sdopr drg 298105 suo eui 51 sdoy dyj 2881035 SUS py ey ur TOUULYO 5 our ouis oui sdop d1 9981035 SHUN OZV eiu 0 pallajsuen 7 18 SERVICE MATERIAL 7 C 19 The following pages include service material for actuator decade assemblies Included are conventional troubleshooting tree Figure 7 C 4 replaceable parts lists Table 7 C 1 SA test procedure flowchart Figure 7 C 5 A20 component locator Figure 7 C 6 A20 Block Diagram Figure 7 C 7 and a schematic Figure 7 8 Tabie 7 1 Replaceable Parts Actuator Logic A20 Heference gs t Mfr 4 Part Number Ot Description Vifr Part Number Designation id Code A20 03495 65520 1 thru 4 ACTUATOR 108316 ASSY 28480 03495 66520 AZOCi 01 40 2 96 CAPACITOR FXD OLUF 80 20 25WVDC 28480 0160 2964 A2002 0140 2964 CAPACITOR FXD GLUF 80 20 25WVDC CER 284 80 0165 2964 2063 0180 0309 CAPACITOR EXD3 4a 7UF 20 10406 56289 15004 TS5X0ULOAZ 2064 0160 2964 CAPACITOR FXO OLUF 80 20 25 0 CER 28480 0166 2964 20 5 160 2964 CAPACITOR FXD 80 20 25WNVOC CER 28480
203. e WE ERA sectionis BISA SS mercury NO normaly open SE Soie ee silicon R Dupont de Nemours DECIMAL MULTIPLIERS Symbols Muttiplier Prefix Symio Es 1012 centi i 109 milii 106 micro nano pico fernto l EES STD B 2734 D SEGNATORS Ded da Ade ede oto Miis assembly Haro transistor 5 terminal strip motor eme ae eae aloes hsater GOR transistor diode microcircuit scotia Vae ax qfi eara foe cae battery he cee oe integrated circuit Fs resistor vacuum tube neon bulb photocell etc IMP 0 capacHOr nenn ans RT are eese thermistor MP advocates a cable CH rays diras ax wn ga 8 2222 eg pte MP CORE socket L nerean ama ree ES Rm E inductor sa transformer XDS larmphoider E hs Bock al gr dn limp Mo wie tows e s Y ee meter oe acs terminal board fuseholder Eie mise electronic part MP mechanical part thermocouple
204. e calculation for finding Variable S Stores last channel number to be tested operator defined 7 67 Locations 7 68 The locations shown below represent all possible line numbers where each variable may be found In cases where the letter representing the variable is used as text that location will also be listed um 4 m fes HE Kar Li uet a oc 4 US an 4 14 3 1 i pre qu eem ur bere h m Er 224 a 1 m u E 4 F L5 i e a DE 1 3 Loi PA nun 40 aay mM st atm y Lal 1 1 ho u Pr m to 1 i A p PR 1 t al UN 41 1 E 4 ie m 40 EA 9 Sois vt E PM SP Dea MER e t 1 a 4 oro e a4 7 m 1 2 spa t m 2002 ov d 1 1 de ca Lon 5 o Q7 n y 4 i21 1 1 aut nee r T 1 Is 3 i i t t 74 1 Er n an 4 4 3 9 m t i Ao X 1 rt r 3 H jm 472 um em Ir de 4 i cc 4 t MM Pont m E Tage hj p t bets t i t 3 eek 1 4 je Thane
205. e channel wires from the connector regardless of the external cir cuitry capabilities 7 6 RECOMMENDED SERVICE EQUIPMENT 7 7 Table 7 1 lists the recommended service equipment for the 3495 and all options Table 7 1 Recommended Service Equipment Instrument Digital Voltmeter Oscilloscope Calculator Connector L ogic Probe Duo Decade Options Only Option 100 only Cr tica Specifications o NNNM FETR Reading Rate 21000 readings sec hp Model 3437A or hp Model 3466A Controller Capability Signature Analyzer SA Compatible hp Model 5004A Signature Analyzer Recommended Mode hp Model 1740 hp 9825 with General and Extended VO ROM 7 1 Section VIE 7 8 PRELIMINARY TROUBLESHOOTING 7 9 Before beginning an in depth service procedure check the scanner assemblies for visual signs of trouble These include burnt or loose components loose or broken con nectors and possible shorted or open conductors A prelim inary check sheet is in Table 7 2 NOTE Pay particular attention to loose or bent pins on terminal channel assembly connectors which require frequent installation and removal Table 7 2 Preliminary Check Sheet Did You Check power fuse switches and cord Check power supply and adjust if necessary Clean and check option connectors Cycle through relays to check for ope
206. e four data lines through D4 L go low true giving an invalid digit code of 15 This causes the logic assemblies having the appropriate Close or Clear address to blank out their displays and open all of their relays at execute Model 3495 3495 SERVICE GROUP A 7 50 Decades Clear Signal 7 51 3495 A s with serial numbers below 142800736 will issue a Decades Clear signal in states 35 25 and 15 when the character is received during the HP IB Data mode or when Selected Device Clear SDC is received during the Command mode An invalid digit code of 15 appears at the Unit s Storage Flip Flops on the logic assemblies The exe cute signal in state 03 then opens all relays and blanks all the decade displays if the 3495A is listening 7 52 On 3495 A s with serial number of 142800736 or above the Selected Device Clear SDC command or instruction is treated as a Device Clear DCL command if the scanner is listening This results in entering state 37 27 or 17 scanner which is not listening will treat the SDC command or instruction as a Carriage Return E or Group Execute Trigger This results in entering state 36 26 or 16 7 53 Decades Clear also occurs in states 37 27 and 17 when the universal Device Clear DCL command is received in the Command mode options are then cleared in state 03 7 A 54 Execute Signal 7 A 55 Execute signal redun
207. e on the performance test card at the rear of this section 4 6 j Repeat Steps d through i for each isolation you wish to test k Repeat Steps d through j for each channel you wish to test 4 28 CAPACITANCE TEST 4 29 Specifications 4 29 The following specifications are verified in this test Opt 001 Opt 002 Opt 004 High to Low Channel Capacitance Open ISpr I15pF lt 350 Closed I5pF lt 25pF lt 400pF Interchannel Capaci lt i2pF lt 2 lt 10pF tance Model 3495 4 30 Description 4 3 This test verifies that the high to low or A to B capacitances and interchannel capacitances are below the specified values Channels can be closed by an external increment input closure to ground A momentary contact switch can serve to make these closures Low thermal mea surements are made from the connector COMMON termi nals Actuator channel measurements are made on individu al channels Interchannel capacitances are made from chan nel input terminals NOTE The suggested FLC meter requires a one hour warmup time 4 32 Test Procedure HIGH d LOW Y pu HIGH gt Pe E LOW i t GUARD HIGH 2 m LOW 2 ge HIGH 3 4 gt GUARD LOW 3 am A GUARD HIGH 4 i iG GUARD gt GUAR T Section IV EQUIPMENT REQUIRED 3495A Option 100 Accessory 44413A Meter hp 4271B w 16032A Test Lead Accessory
208. e the option connector to the input terminals of the channel to be tested Refer to Figure 4 9 for repre sentative wiring Install the connector into the SCANNER h Increment the scanner to the channel to be tested Worst case channel measurements should be adequate 1 Record the 10 kHz reference value VREF on the performance test card at the end of this section This measurement is required for each channel to be tested therefore you may wish to take this measurement on all of them Reset the Test Oscillator controls as follows RANGE uc sonde X 10 Hz MERI IE Rig GEISER 10 Frequency OUTPUT ATTENUATOR 3 0 volts 4 9 Section V FEST OSCILLATOR m NO a 9 0 REFER FIGURES 49 ANO 441 FOR WiAING DIAGRAMS 111704 EOE SCANNER 34854 EXT INCR Model 3495 DMM hp 4534 SNC PES ee SNE TO 421272279 c od SE a Eee bur a 4 50 TEAMING TIGR 119430 s b CONNECT TEST OSCILLATOR FOR AFFERENCE ADEJSTMENTS Figure 4 10 Frequency Response Test Setup Table 4 2 V VREE Test Limits Limits Lower Upper Option 001 Option 002 Option 004 9660 1 0351 9660 1 0351 9772 1 0233 Reference Reference Reference 9660 1 0351 9660
209. e troubleshooting program is automatically loaded by the Scanner Verification Check As soon as the Trouble shooting program is loaded the program will print 4 tte H nn m ir spo 32 EF i faba 1 y DU Len gue qe LE r f p i if et fin 142 4n 4 e f if ve ke 4 a Cur H iae PS the des ut bus pH erika un DS te 144 JD m e em an u 921 ate j EN no a lae F aa toro 2 Wa er ade Sut t hpr 6 8 apa ere che II MO Me 1444 a K i i i 2 E 4 op 44444 gaama 4444 4 cs 1 jer 5 I i s vr 47 ud moss jos P M DER je in au rb Ey ij 4 dun fee Sn dese rer in ds emn des woher d me dau Lin dicas abe d t vil 3o FR in f 4 Ser ECE d m qur 3 s PON 4429 sedi 444 Pople 42294 4451 TOME 1 A h ea E m J MU t E 1 41 UH IO tr Ek LIES gms antem an ar it 4 M 4 a i q a by
210. ear is used explicitly for decade options Open is used explicitly for duo decade options 3 26 system of hardware Close and Clear addresses for channel decades provides considerable versatility in operat ing the 3495A Channels are programmed by sending two digit instructions to the 3495 a ten s channel digit and a unit s channel digit Each decade may be hardware pro grammed to respond to a specific ten s channel digit of O through 7 by positioning jumper wires on the logic assem blies The 8 possible decade addresses provide 80 possible channel numbers from 00 through 79 Separate jacks are provided for decade Close and Clear addresses NOTE Each 3495A with decade options has up to 80 channel addresses but a maximum 40 channels Modei 3495A 3 27 decade address SENSITIZES a decade to respond to a ten s channel digit of a channel programming instruction The decade Close address es select the ten s channel digit s that close channel s on that decade The decade Clear address es select the ten s channel digit s that open all the channels on that decade The following examples illustrate the jumper positions resulting Close and Clear addresses and channel response to instructions POSITIONS LER JUMPER a d 7 CLOSE CLEAR ADDRESSES ADDRESSES 00 09 CHANNEL ACTIVITY The channel s on this decade will close on channel instructions of 00 thru 09 C
211. ecured f Repeat A E for all the wires to be connected to the terminals 2 25 Guard lines are connected to guard terminals in a similar manner If guard connections are not made at the point of measurement a Guard Common to Low Common connection is needed Guarding principles are discussed in Section Guarding 2 26 Wiring the A23 Terminal Assembly Option 002 2 27 Four terminal strips on the A23 Terminal Assembly all four on the front side provide connection points for ten channels of and B lines Two guard terminals are also available on the assembly The terminal assignments are shown in Section VII Service Group 2 28 To connect wires to the terminals follow the procedure given for the Low Thermal Terminal Assembly 2 29 Two threaded standoffs on the A23 Terminal Assembly are provided for making guard connection SECTION H Stripped guard wires may be connected to these standoffs with standard 8 32 screws 2 30 Wiring the 24 Thermacouple Reference Connector Option 003 2 31 Three terminal strips arranged on the front side of the connector PC board provide connection points for ten channels of High Low and Guard lines Channel is tied to a temperature sensing thermistor leaving nine 9 channels for thermocouple wires Two additional terminal strips on the front side of the connector PC board provide two sets of common terminals The terminal assignments are shown in Section VH Service
212. ed Junction Thermocouples 3 138 The grounded junction thermocouple is typically used for the measurement of static or flowing corrosive gas and liquid temperatures and for high pressure applications The junction is physicaily attached to the sheath to provide faster response than the ungrounded type 3 139 With grounded junction thermocouples guard nections should be made on individual sheaths at the point of measurement if possible Otherwise make channel guard to low connections Use 18 AWG or thinner wire to reduce thermal offsets NOTE Use solid wire when connecting thermocouples and guard connections This reduces the effects of thermal offsets due to inherent stranded wire qualities Section NOTE Electrical isolation from the measurement point is advised to eliminate unwanted signals from the thermocouple circuit A thermal compound may be used to attach the thermocouples to the point of measurement 3 140 HIGH SPEED BURST MEASUREMENTS 3 141 Burst measurements at speeds up to 1000 channels per second is achieved with the fast controller option Option 100 and the duo decade channel options Options 004 and 005 3 142 The equipment required for this application includes an HP IB compatible controller and a program mable DVM with a reading rate in excess of 1000 channels per second 3 143 Figure 3 19 illustrates how an hp Model 3495A Scanner can be connected to hp Model 9825A Calcu
213. el instructions super cedes all previous channel instructions in the same decade Example 25 26E Closes Channels 25 and 26 on an actuator decade but only Channel 26 on a low thermal decade or duo decade f The Clear instruction immediately opens channels An Execute E instruction is not needed Example 240 Opens all channels CORE Insures that only Channel 24 is closed g No operator instructions are always ignored h F and L require complete instruction fields follow ing the F and L special characters An execute instruction is not needed Example EZE LS Defines a block of channels with a first channel of 21 and last chan nel of 32 20 F is not affected Lis defined to 29 Duo decade is cleared opens Channel 20 is closed i If F lt L the 3495A increments through the chan nels If F gt L the 3495A decrements through the chan nels FE and LE output the current first and last channels respectively This does NOT change the current value of F or L k External Increment Off 11 External Incre ment 1 An S Software Increment is immediately exe cuted and is not affected by the 10 or Il instructions m The first S special character acts as an execute to accumulated instructions Example 22 55 Closes channel 22 and increments or decrements ONCE n The first increment decrement jumps
214. elationships 7 D 5 7 0 3 A42 Relay Connection Guide 7 D 6 7 D 4 3495A Duo Decades Troubleshooting 7 0 7 7 D 8 7 D 5 SA Test Procedure Flowchart SAS 00 aS 7 D 9 7 6 A40 Component Locator 7 02 11 7 D 7 A40 Block 7 D 11 7 D 8 Duo Decade Logic 40 7 D 11 7 D 9 Duo Decade Channels A25 A41 A42 A45 46 7 D 13 7 D 14 SERVICE GIOUDE s ig ey dob UU 7 E 1 7 62 A8 Block Diagram 7 E 2 7 E 3 Control ROM Plowchart 7 3 7 4 SA Test Procedure Flowchart SAO thru 48 7 E 7 7 E 8 7 5 A8 Component Locator 7 9 7 E 6 8 Block 7 11 7 12 7 7 High Speed Controller A8 7 E 11 7 E 12 Model 3495 Section I SECTION GENERAL 1 1 INTRODUCTION 1 2 This Operating and Service Manual contains informa tion required to install operate test adjust and service the Hewlett Packard Model 3495A Scanner 1 3 INSTRUMENTS COVERED BY MANUAL 1 4 Attached to the instrument is a serial number plate The serial number is in the form 0000400000 It is in two parts the first four digits and the letter are the serial prefix and the last five digits are the suffix The prefix is the same for all identical instruments it changes only when a change is made to the instrument The suffix howe
215. elay with two normaliy open contacts per relay Single unswitched guard for 10 channels Any com bination of 10 channels may be ciosed or opened simultane ously Maximum Contact Ratings Voltage 100 V rms Current 2 A rms Power 200 VA Maximum Input Voltage Between any two terminals 230 V peak Guard to chassis 200 V peak Guard to low 200 V peak Thermal Offset lt 30 uV differential EMF Switching Time 40 msec maximum For circuits fused at 2 amps or less and less than 200 VA capac ity 1 2 Option 003 Accessory 44403A 9 Channel Reference Junction Relay Assembly Decade Type Three pole low thermal dry reed relays Third pole switches guard and is not low thermal Break before make operation with partialiy sequenced closure Guard closes before low and high relays close Guard opens after low and high relays open Up to 9 channels of thermcoupie connec tions Remaining channel measures reference temperature Maximum Contact Ratings Voltage 42 V peak Current 200 mA non inductive Power 2 VA Maximum Input Voltage Between any two terminals 42 V peak Guard to chassis 200 V peak Thermal Offset ambient ternperature 1 C lt 2 HV differen tia EMF Isolation gt 107 Q between high iow guard Switching Time 10 msec maximum Option 004 Accessory 44404A 20 Channel Low Thermal Retay Assembly Type Three pole low thermal dry reed relays per channel One pole is guard Break be
216. end the commands Table 3 4 d Enter the Data mode ATN HIGH e Send the instructions Table 3 5 3 67 Once the communication path is established the Scanner will listen until addressed to unlisten If not addressed to unlisten Step b may be skipped If commands are not to be sent Step c may be skipped This would be the equivalent of sending a Data message If the communi cation path need not be re established and no commands are to be sent Steps a c may be skipped and Step d per formed only once However addressing all devices to unlisten prior to Talker and Listener addressing is advised in every algorithm step to guarantee the integrity of the communication path 3 68 HP IE Command Made 3 69 The functions of the 3495A Commands listed Table 3 4 are described below Selected Device Clear SDC Opens all channels if the 34954 is presently addressed to listen a listening 3495 Table 3 5 instructions Shaded instructions are valid with Option 100 only INSTRUCTION i Cat Channel FE Last Channel Software increment No Operator Delimiter With preceding exceptions ASCII CHARACTER Digit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 48 thru 57 Space SP Ciear C JUL DEL Any other character DECIMAL 1 thru 126 3 9 Section IH Group Execute Trigger GET Executes all previously unexecuted HP
217. ent Ram AA 5 m Array aa ARAN Pe arr na a e a e ai 1 m EIA T MN METHOD MC qme rara T 2 Y ERRARE T m AA u all ring FI NA ET FO PVE VA EEE TATTOOS EE c nina roa a NI M AAA E m Akh PA A A A SNMP AN a E LL LLL IN a eei EE m e C I ro rms ques n M ern un aia meee A m mI a i i TET j 4 N pena CI Av St if Ex 4 gt Od Org fF f Ors gt pe e EET EE D MPG TE omm sud i 1 H i i t 4 remm ES i 4 i A T 4 n le 4 i cde 1 wen q qqP _ EE NUON E MD sie ad f M aer i f i i id A ix el 9 Lebe Sim 424 7 Grd ba S Bad d Ore ba ve pet el Qa ue E b 1 11 1 5 14 m 407 i i
218. es in Temperature Measurements 3 111 Thermocouples are temperature to voltage trans ducers which are used extensively in temperature measuring insttuments By connecting two wires made of different metals a voltage is developed across the connection This voltage is called the Seebeck or thermal voltage and depends on the composition of the two metals and the temperature of the measuring junction To measure the See beck voltage a thermocouple circuit is formed as in Figure 3 14 creating a new junction called the reference junction METAL To THERMAL EmF PROPORTIONAL TO To T Figure 3 14 Thermocouple Circuit Becton MLLIVOLTS 20 HO COPPER RON 1538 e i CUMEL TEMPERATURE C Figure 3 15 V vs T for Common Thermocouple Materials The open circuit voltage of this circuit is dependent on the composition of the two metals and the difference in temp erature between the two junctions A graph of the voltage to temperature characteristics of commonly used metals is shown in Figure 3 22 Note that these characteristics are referenced to platinum 3 112 The thermocouple materials are chosen such that a temperature difference Ta develops series aiding thermal emf s which appear as the open circuit voltage If the elements consist of the same metals the thermal emf s are equal and opposite in polarity
219. es not open or does not close 7 33 The verification program checks each channel assem bly separately in the Scanner under test Each relay in the channel under test High Low and Guard for the Low Thermal assemblies and for actuator assemblies A and B is tested by the Scanner Verification Check If a defective relay is found the program will print out an error message indicating the defective relay channel number and the type of defect resistive or shorted 7 34 In the case of a resistive relay as soon as the defect is detected the error message is printed 7 35 If one or more relays are shorted the program will automatically load in the Scanner troubleshooting program first This program will instruct the Operator to open cer tain switches on the Scanner Test Fixture until the shorted relay s is found The program will then output the error message on the printer Defective relays may be replaced easily and simply by following the Scanner Repair pro cedures found in Service Groups B and C of this manual NOTE The Verification Check program flowcharts be found in Figures 7 1 and 7 2 Section Vil 7 36 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED 7 37 To run the Scanner Verification Check you will need the hp Model 9830A Calculator hp Model 9866A Printer hp Model 3495A Scanner hp Model 3490A Option 30 Multimeter 3495A 9830A Cassette hp Part No 44195 10001 Low Thermal and or Actuator Scanner Test Fixture Chp Part
220. eufag 01 pi pry aida ONS 3384203 ary En SEIU ONCE PODS S Lid BEd 0969 p vid yA SHAME 32940 S3A 1584195 sginiBub S ese ay Gn soriday TON SN Ld EHRT HODE G uid 6NEd 0680 v Ue gn a1hiSuBig sug 3281 Enid Sansa Up PULSI GSH ABS 3994107 a niguD g essei ay Sey LUM ay 0005 ENE Q090 5864 Gl utd 6000 5764 PL MEd HAG BEd L Ud 00006 GN Ed i Mid BED OL Cn saimigubis 10843 ABH ul BinHe s aL ON ON 9010 APR ut 5 SBA PX BRA 21200 rog SIUSUOGLUO PELEHIOSSY AnG S34 j ALGOJA 1ueuielou Busuonoun y sj uondo 3ugtumj2Ui 21951 5800 ON saa en td 1581 e njeu g 9 YG DOY NS 2249 Ons 300 t7 4124 113618 Check Signatures 7 Pin 8 HOF 1 Pin 11 H71P Are These
221. eves e Pado PBIe de Fl Bet It Sem qm EMD OF PROGRAM 7 8 Model 3495 7 40 Definition of Program Variables 7 41 Each of the variables used in the Scanner Verification Program is defined below C Channel First channel to be tested C2 Last channel to be tested D Reed Test Low 2 High 3 Guard 9 Finished DVM Measurement on Channel C FLAG Failed Test FLAG Reed fails to close gt 1 ohm T FLAG Title has been printed Y FLAG More channels are to be tested 7 42 Program Modification 7 43 The Verification Program can be modified to test a 3495 Scanner with a different address than used in the original program by changing the Listen addresses You will need your 3495A 9830A Cassette Chp Part No 44195 10001 and also a blank cassette hp Part No 9162 0050 NOTE It is suggested you store your revised program on a cassette for future use If the cassette is initially completelv blank vou should mark the file lengths that will be required first Then FIND the file before beginning to STORE the program 7 44 To modify the Verification Program follow the steps below a Insert the 3495A 9830A Cassette into the cassette transport and close the door b Load the 3495A Verification Check onto the key board by pressing Mete 5 ER i ou i iif i t LIUM Then 6 3 t Eu rn u
222. fore make Maximum Contact Ratings Voltage 42 V peak Current 40 mA non inductive Power 1 VA Maximum input Voltages Between any two terminals 42 V peak Guard to chassis 42 V peak Therma Offset ambient temperature 10 lt 1 uV differen tial EMF isolation gt 10 Q between high low guard Switching Time 1 msec maximum 3495 Section 1 Table 1 1 Specifications Cont d Option 005 Accessory 44405A Reference Junction Relay Assembly 13 Channels Type Three pole low thermal dry reed relays per channel One pole is guard Break before make Up to 19 channels of ther mocoupie connections Remaining channel measures refer ence temperature Maximum Contact Ratings Valtage 42 Current 46 mA non inductive Power 1 Maximum Input Voltages Between any two terminais 42 V peak Guard to chassis 42 V peak Thermat Offset ambient temperature 1C lt 1 aV differen tial EMF isolation gt 107 Q between high tow guard Switching Time 1 msec maximum Option 100 44413A High Speed Scanner Controller Adds high speed capability to the 3495A Used with Option 004 or 005 to provide a sequenced scan of up to 1000 channeis second for one 3495A Synchronization is achieved with a trigger cable connection between the high speed scanner and a measuring instrument such as the Hewlett Packard 3437A System Voltmeter AC Performance
223. ft up on the relay to remove rel ainer over th ret al ide the met Insert the replacement and s 6 ide screws Replace the cover and s 7 board into the me slot it was removed Ina and Actuator Term ay Assembly mbly sh Insert the Actuator Re 8 sa th lled in ta ins ould be e Relay Asse Th 5 om fr Verify that the new actuator relay is operational 9 7 11 Section Model 3495 Table 7 2 Parts Actuator Channel Display A21 A22 A23 7 C 12 Reference Mfr ld o 4 Part Number Ot Description Mfr Part Number Designation Code AG 03 49 5 66506 1 thru 4 ACTUATOR DISPLAY ASSY 28480 03495 66506 A6CRO 1901 0040 DIODE SWITCHING 2NS 30V SOMA 28480 1901 0040 1901 0060 DIOOE SHITCHING ZAS 30V 50MA 28480 1901 0060 AGCRZ 1901 0040 DIGOE SWITCHING ZNS 30V SOMA 28480 1901 0040 6 1901 0040 DIUDE SMITCHING 2NS 30V SOMA 28480 1901 0040 AECRS 1901 0040 DIGOE SHITCHING 245 30V SOMA 28480 1901 0040 ASCRS 1901 0040 DIGDE SWITCHING 205 30V SOMA 28480 1901 0040 AGERE 1901 0060 DIODE SWiTCHING 205 30 SOKA 28480 2901 0040 1901 0040 DIQDE SHITCHING ZNS 30Y SOMA 28480 901 0040 AGTAB 1901 0040 DIUBE SRITCHING ZNS 30V SONA 28483 1901 0040 6 9 1901 0040 DIODE SWI
224. g with a 3490A Digital Multimeter is illustrated in Figure 3 7 functional view of this application is shown in Figure 3 8 3 98 A physical view of four wire ohms scanning with a 3490A Digital Multimeter is illustrated in Figure 3 9 functional view of this application is shown in Figure 3 10 3 99 Guard terminals are provided for each channel If a Guard to Low connection is not made at the point of mea surement a guard Common to Low Common connection is 3490 Q Signal High Decade Close address 1 Signal Low input High HIGH 20 needed on the terminal assembly 3 100 Actuator Decade Applications Option 002 3 101 Actuator decade channels are typically used for voltage scanning and matrix scanning applications 3 102 A physical view of the terminal connections for voltage scanning with a 3490A Digital Multimeter is shown in Figure 3 11 A functional view of this application is shown in Figure 3 12 Input Low Guard Decade Close address 1 SHIELD HIGH Ge HIGH COM HIGH COM LOW LOW LOW 20 LOW HIGH 1 GUARD HIGH 21 GUARD COM LOW 1 LOW 21 HIGH 2 HIGH 22 LOW 2 GUARD 0 LOW 22 GUARD 20 HIGH 3 le GUARD 1 HIGH 23e GUARD 21 LOW 3 2 LOW 23 GUARD 22 HIGH 4 e GUARD 3 HIGH 24 L_B GUARD 23 LOW 4 gt GUARD4 LOW 24 GUARD 24 Oniy channels 4 and 24 hookups shown
225. ge if not blanked out High low relay closes V Ten s Display Transfer High Low Relay Close Decade Execute ES 151 Qualifier Y ves Ten s Display Transfer T urn Q saan EEE E Guard Relay Open Ten s Display Transfer Full Relay Voltage Decade Disable Relay Opening 2nd Flag Qualifier Guard Relay Close Decade Disable Fuil Relay Voltage Ten s Display Transfer Full Relay Voltage Decade Disable i Guard Relay Close Ten s Display Transfer High Low Relay Close 3435 3982 Figure 7 B 3 Low Thermal State Diagram 7 3 WELLE V 7 4 GEDVIOE 7 B 8 DECADE DATA STORAGE BLOCK 7 9 The unit s channel digit stored in the A4 or 8 Data Storage flip flops is trans ferred to the Unit s Storage flip flops when a Decade Select signal from 4 or 8 gives a Unit s Store signal via a decade Close address jumper The Unit s Storage flip flops are cleared to an invalid digit code of 15 if Decade Select gives the Decade Clear signal via a decade Clear address jumper 7 B 10 At the same time that the unit s channel digit is being stored on 10 the ten s channel digit binary code 51 53 is being transferred from 4 or A8 to the Ten s Display Storage flip flops with the Ten s Display Store signal at U12 7 11 RELAY STATE MACHINE BLOCK 7 12 The Relay Clock advance
226. git on whichever Logic assembly has a Close address equal to the ten s channel digit stored on A4 d Execute signal causes the Logic assembly to close the relays of the channel corresponding to the unit s digit stored on the assembly The unit s digit and ten s display digit stored on the Logic assembly are transferred to the Display assembly 7 A 15 Channel Clearing 7 16 There are four different ways to open all relays on one or all options Tum On At the time of instrument turn on all data storage registers are cleared and all relays opened b Decade Clear Address The Channel Closure sequence opens all relays of a decade if the Logic assembly has a Clear address equal to the ten s channel digit In Step 3 the Decade Select signal clears the unit s and ten s storage registers to an invalid digit code that causes the Execute signal in Step 4 to open all the relays of the decade c Clear Instruction or Command Instruction or SDC or DCL command is received by the Ad assembly and gives a Decades Clear signal which acts as a decade Clear address but instead clears all options rather than just the ones having the Clear address d Lone Ten s Channel Digit A delimiter or an execute instruction following a ten s channel digit clears the unit s and ten s data registers A4 and gives the Decade Logic assemblies having a Close or Clear address equal to the ten s channel digit Execute s
227. gt 1NVODNOS i 39234 45137 150 el MIS NAR H lt 6 2 OT 4 Ye Tw T EA ISP rue NS DXGN 1850 95 un E AYOWSW is rs se oe TOES HSA Sa 4994015 aid v SY O3ovid3u mse en nn zm B THEO S NZL Lam Sin ONY Sn 1 YX 1 H dw VEO TON T3NNVHO i S LINA E YA y Enzo mS S eee oM 05 i En E S ee 1 9914 ONINSdO E T a gt Oly WON E lt 0 ee a ae 1 914 AVT3H i ct En PEN 41415 LX3N Bartra vi an 209999600 EE 52559 2 fe lt 0699 Ey E E exec D ns 4 IBNASSY HO123NNO2 1845 iNiOd 1531 Model 3495 Section SERVICE GROUP LOW THERMAL DECADES Options 001 and 003 Accessories 44401A and 44403A Service Group B contains theory and service information for low thermal decades on the 3495 Scanner Options 001 and 003 are included in this service group E re DECADES Tx SCANNER CHASSIS COUPLE Zei WITH TWO OPTION 0015 AND CHANNEL i TWO OPTION 003 ASSEMBLY F CONNECTOR RELAY FLAG
228. half of the pull in voltage in state 7 to be applied to the high low relay coil SESE Model 34934 Model 3495 SERVICE GROUP 7 B 20 State 2 7 B 21 High Low Relay Close signal goes false cutting off Q2 and opening the high low relay that was held closed in state 3 7 B 22 State 7 23 Guard Relay Open signal clears the Guard Relay Control US flip flops presenting an invalid digit code of 15 to the Relay Select decoder U7 All Relay Select lines go high to open the guard relay that was held closed in state 3 7 24 State 4 7 B 25 The ten s channel digit is transferred from the ten s Display Storage U12 flip flops to the Ten s Display Control U13 flip flops by the Ten s Display Transfer signal Binary coded lines TD1 through TD3 pass the ten s channel digit to the display 7 26 If the Unit s Storage flip flops have an invalid output digit code of 15 due to having been cleared by an invalid digit code from A4 or A8 or the Unit s Clear signal the binary bits 4 and 8 US3 and US4 develop the Blank signal at U13 which blanks out the ten s and unit s display digits Decade Disable signal clears the U6 flip flop making Decade Enable and Decade Execute 1st Qualifier signals false Now the state machine must stop when it reaches state 3 and wait for Decade Enable to be made true again by another Decade Select and Execute from 4 or 8 7 B 27 The state machine lea
229. hannel instructions for other decades will NOT affect the channels on this decade JUMPER CLOSE POSITIONS CLEAR _ 7 CLOSE CLEAR ADDRESSES ADDRESSES 10 19 00 09 20 79 CHANNEL ACTIVITY The channel s on this decade will close on channel instructions of 10 thru 19 Channel instructions for other decades will clear this decade 3495 JUMPER POSITIONS S CLOSE CLEAR _ 0 lo pm 2 54 AC y a E y 17 7 yr CLOSE CLEAR ADDRESSES ADDRESSES 0 59 00 39 CHANNEL ACTIVITY This channel s on this decade will close on channel instructions of 40 thru 59 Using a 4X or 5X instruction is immaterial since 41 will close the same channel as 51 Channel instructions from 00 thru 39 will clear this decade 3 28 Selecting Decade Addresses 3 29 Factory installed decades are given non overlapping Close addresses of 00 39 depending on the number of decades installed Low Thermal decades are given 7 Clear addresses not corresponding to the Close address Actuator decades have NO Clear addresses wired 3 30 If you intend to modify the decade Close and Clear addresses of your 3495A you must first remove the factory installed jumpers Install jumpers in the Close address posi tion s you want that decade to respond to Next install jumpers in the Clear address position s you want to clear that decade Figure 3 1 illustrates six
230. he S3 signal of all 10 assemblies and the S2 signal of all A20 assemblies It therefore occurs in states 4 6 and 7 on the 10 assemblies and in states 3 and 2 on the A20 assemblies But it may occur somewhat before or after the required interval on a particular assembly since the Relay Clocks are not synchronized 7 15 Relay Closing Flag goes true in Relay State 4 rather than in state 6 when closure actually begins to ensure that the much faster operating A4 Control State Machine will not miss this flag The Control State Machine leaves state 04 when Relay Opening Flag goes false and quickly advances to state 06 where it stops for the duration of Relay Ciosing Flag By having Relay Closing Flag go true before or at the same time that Relay Opening Flag goes false it is assured that the Control State Machine will not go through state 06 before Relay Closing Flag can go true and stop the Control State Machine in state 06 1 8 16 RELAY AND DISPLAY CONTROL BLOCK 7 17 The relay and display control circuits operate in strict accordance with the six states of the Relay State Machine as described 7 B 18 State 7 B 19 All of the channel relays are open or one is closed in state 3 High Low Relay Close signal is true enabling Q2 in conjunction with a true Relay Select signal to hold the high low and guard relays of one channel closed All Relay Select lines are high false if no relays are closed A1 is cut off allowing only one
231. he controller will print out any channels that appear resistive After the resistive channel numbers have been printed out addi tional instructions are printed as shown below Cat np aux Li na VIO ORI Oh tU E dd gt la gt gt 3 2 2 Lad 4 p RD E T LA Gy 3 m E d E NEM Fh I 1 s il In 1 bo EL toa PD E t After both Test No 1 and Test No 2 have been completed for the selected channels the controller will allow additional chan nels or a retest of certain channels by displaying More Channels for Test Y N 1 0 A response will cause the program to recycie to the channel request and retest the new channels A 0 response will recycie the program to the reed test selec The remaining reeds may be tested of the program may be aborted by selecting REED TEST 0 END OF TEST selection If O is selected the controller will display END OF TEST and print ETI E UU T F PILES JIBYIMO 1591 SuULOOUSATGNOL ISUULOS CL 910814 dO 068 028 AV i3H di 33 OL WY dOO0Hd ANETTE Y SLNOAXS NOY SS3Hd
232. he instru ment The channel number input should be limited to those channels available on the decade assembly under test Channel Number Controller displays MORE CHAN NELS TO BE TESTED The Operator should respond with yes and e 27 v7 1 1 einem PL Q 2 Model 3495 A Section 7 Remove the Test Fixture and replace with the Answer yes if you desire to continue testing the appropriate Terminal Assembly decade assembly If the Verification Checks for the system are com A complete explanation of all instructions and plete you may want to reload any Special Func Operator response is provided in Table 2 2 tion programs that are not already located on File L of the 3495A 9830A Cassette The Special 5 When the 3495A Verification Program has been Function programs supplied with the system were completed insure the tape has been rewound by loaded earlier in the procedure To load additional pressing LETS programs press 6 To rerun this Verification Test for the next decade assembly move the Test Fixture to the new decade assembly and repeat the Verification a Checks following the Operating instructions us Tel P ELT Es NOTE To repeat the Scanner Troubleshooting pro gram for the same decade assembly just press File Number P TE amu 5 T T
233. he system is now ready to resume normal opera tions Table 7 3 Controller Instructions and Operator Responses The instructions to the operator begin as soon as RUN EXECUTE has been pressed Refer to the paragraphs below for a discussion of each instruction and the response if applicable After the header has been printed the controller will print 3 pr n t dars ges c t visi pt TEE au IU 44 np PH pu n DU Im SU sU 12 1771 5 r i m pp 1 da tf i 3441 Le IH i f i m m ita 4444 j i 11 ri 3 j fered i 45 p ja aa LS ini aaa IR 3 md Farad um 1 eo De ast 11 pnr Usi m rhe Vest 444 t 3 4 re a uat d dae 6 444 pn 4414 m us SUD ur i 1144 pn T ya x p 3 te 14444 n i 144 npe ap e t br t j F i ER D ye Pul 41 t 3 ote f inn 5 444 TI ri I F ir u d 1 td Yo ganas mn t 3 heer que 22 4 Qe qme PU yer 4 n oy peer kun pu Lec m nr pe de 7 4 TI a p m 4 4 02 EIN
234. he ther mocouple table conformity error is system dependent This error occurs when translating the reference temperature to correction voltage via the NBS tables The ohmmeter accuracy error is determined from 3455 1 year specifications The net temperature error due to ohmmeter inaccuracy may be determined by dividing the maximum error in the thermistor resistance measurement by the worst case thermal sensitivity of the thermistor Assuming a 2 ohm relay contact error the net temperature error due to ohmmeter inaccuracy is 066 To be safe 08 is used 3 123 A maximum dynamic scanner offset voltage of 2 microvolts is possible with the Model 3495A Scanner and should be included in the calculation Another slight mea surement error is possible when measuring thermocouple voltage This system dependent error may be determined from DVM specifications With the Model 3455A DVM using Type J thermocouples at a 600 C measuring junction temperature an 11 microvolt error is possible When trans ferring these voltage readings into temperatures an addi tional 1 C temperature measurement error is possible 3 124 By using Equation 2 the overall possible measure ment error can be calculated this example an overall error of 83 C results Any user calibration errors would be added to this figure NOTE This representative error applies to both options 003 and 005 within their stated dynamic environment conditions
235. her listeners 7 A 30 NRFD Enable is the clocked Data Valid DAVC signal from HP IB talker It goes true and false to control NRFD except when NRFD must be held true by Enable I or Enable II while the 3495A is getting ready to receive another ASCII character NRFD Enable III alone controls NRFD when address commands or instructions to other addressed instruments are being sent on the 7 31 Not Data Accepted 7 32 The Not Data Accepted handshake signal is defined as follows USB USA U7B ___ t Y NDAC IFC ADR DAVC Ready Mode It is directly controlled by the clocked Data Valid DAVC signal from an talker The contro signal IFC must be false IFC and either the HP IB must be in the Command mode the 3495A must be presently addressed to listen ADR 7 9 Section Vii 7 A 10 SERVICE GROUP A Table 7 A 2 Data Next State Code at 4014 SCANNER INPUT CONTROL CHARACTER ASCII DATA NEXT STATE CODE 9 COMMAND MODE Selected Device Clear SDC 5 Group Execute Trigger BS Device Clear DCL DC4 others 2 HPIBDATA MODE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 9 i No Operator Digit Space SP Clear C Execute Operator NUL DEL i Delimiter others Determines which state follows state 30 20 or 10 See Figure 3 6 2 including all
236. hods Literal i instructions Computed Instructions 10 fmt 2f 3 0 Computed Channels 10 7 720 Instructions 10 wrt 709 instructions 10 wtb 709 Instruction Instruction 20 wrt 709 Channel Channel ROM Needed Extended General Generai HO General MANUA L CHANG hp MODEL 3495A SCANNER Manual Part Number 03495 90012 New Revised item ADDENDA Page 1 2 Paragraph 1 19 Add the following note NOTE High speed switching is intended far burst measure ments only Extensive use of high speed switching places wear on the Reed relays Reed life is inversely proportional to switching speed and loading Page 1 5 Table 1 2 The following supplemental characteristics of the Reeds may be helpfull Reed Life nominal Full Load 210 Operations Dry Load 22107 Operations Page 1 6 Paragraph 1 20 44404A 44405A modification to the 3495 Power Supply Assembly is required on mainframes with serial numbers 1428A02185 and below if four of these accessories are to be installed The modification consists of changing A2R8 from 47 ohms to 33 ohms part number 0812 0066 This change is explained in more detail in hp Service Note 3495A 4 Compli mentary copies are available from your local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office 44413 Modifications to the 3495A Line Voltage Receptacle
237. i FELAN A j ia TERET ire pe EMEN 1 PL w Foe ys 1 pe ana 4 4 3 y 4 Dok tafl I Tim T mmc D 4 a T Xd the See um DES b LE POR Ri iH ig 4 b TOO eT Pre we 4 4 thew 4 le E uui zo To EL urn o LiT 3 Pr t D m et ker A i t T m T pri 7 22 SSeS j Test No 2 will test the relays for their closed resistance The heading and tnstructions are shown below ap n 1 7 pode 1 Fre p DU E p an 1 EU 8 3 iw zd VD d ex CE i 2 pocas 2 4 we Fries hi CiU SR I uS er ah 5 Qo CT Tt t n BU mo Dom MM iod 4 av r H que 4 PL at i e pe LU ed ROW xc TEES 4 h er 1 5 Pour 5 Y 7 rre ii Load ef r 4 m RIT P P 2 1 444 4 Laa Y LEN 1 V it tne Test measurements were within the programmed limits rhe controver will print TEST 2 T
238. ignal then opens all channels of these options NOTE The universal HP IB command does not open all relays in an option but does clear all accumulated data from the 44 assembly 5523 Y ER 7 8 Sertina VII UNUUT A 7 17 INPUT DATA STORAGE BLOCK 7 18 Seven bit parallel ASCII characters being sent on the HP IB are individually stored in U6 and U12 until they can be digested by the 3495A This allows faster com munication on the HP IB because the 3495A is configured to allow the low true Not Data Accepted NDAC handshake line to go high data accepted immediately after the talker drives the Data Valid DAY line low true A new character may then be put on the HP IB by a talker and allowed to settle while the 3495A is decoding the previous character and performing accordingly 7 19 Data Store 7 20 The U6 and 912 flip flops transfer the seven data bits DIO through DIO7 to the D1 through D7 lines when Data Store signal goes true USB USA UAB NE byo Data Store e ATN ADR DAVC RRA rm Ready Mode Data Store occurs at the next Clock pulse after DAV goes true DAV is clocked become DAVC if the control signal Interface Clear is false IFC and either the is in the Command mode or the 3495A is presently addressed to listen ADR 7 A 21 Data Clear 7 A 22 Data Clear signal is developed by the Inter
239. ingeubis pry ms Wid vn 5 ECO Vall 2324518 vulg 8 salnmitubis asau pm meiden FER 8281084 ON ENEA lid zn si 0 dHBE LL3Z LE Utd Gi Vig dfSs Z6tt 6 Mid SAP CSIC 62 94 8 Ug 85 9t 3fl uld 4 SL8n 4049 2311 Heg put 5 541 ON LESH 69 v ilg vETL H608 Wid N Ajpadoag Y d ee P BAN TRUBES Sin SainibuBts 952420 S sp E 827324616 IHOA SJA ON 295383 5141 ay ON uawa SABIE 096 sand ldi 19025 484 114815 ddl D420 5 amp gt PM BUDG 0000 0900 6nd iugutuuopouad SBIEIIPUL 0000 BNEd SL 0000 SNE vi 0000 BN Ed DODO BNEd ainieudis In NdBS 9P3N Sl vOO098 E Lv vi 999 i 828 el 4 8 Nv6c SdHs Li VOB E LIN Ot WORDS IHETT
240. intout you just obtained using the information below Line 30 Change the Listen address CMD L Listen NOTE If the 34904 Multimeter being used to check out the Seanner does not have a Talk and Listen address of V and 6 Lines 60 and 110 must also be changed to the new address Revise each of the Verification Troubleshooting and Special Function programs as indicated below 7 9 Section Since the Troubleshooting and the Special Function programs are already in the Keyboard memory revise these programs first then revise the Verification program Be sure to put the controller in Key Mode first before attempting to call up program lines for the Special Func tion program Key Mode may be entered by pressing aem M so AA Lie Specific Key Number 1 Using the editing keys call up each program line number and revise each line 2 Insert a cassette with blank files available into the cassette transport 3 Mark the selected file for 1300 words by pressing 1 4 1 cn sp FEF 4 Mm NN LN vi 20000000 Selected File EE mw Number E Then VENE D SRG A 20 ee M TERT 5 A E A ST T NND SN HDI 1 ET E ERN b 1 t B H MITA A a 1 1 t mum 4 Store the revised program on the cassette you just marked by pressing Em f
241. ion is a microprocessor controlled replacement for the 4 interface and control assembly The AS assembly is available in place of 4 in Option 100 and as a field installable addition in accessory 44413A 7 E 3 The fast controller assembly uses hp single chip N channel 8 bit processor and program ROM Jumpers 1 and 2 select power supply voltages for selection of EROM 2708 type or mask programmed ROM A 1 MHz crystal controlled clock is the clock source for the fast controller 7 E 4 One factory selected component R29 is on the A8 interface and control assem bly This resistor is used in the rectification circuitry for supplying a negative back gate de bias to the nanoprocessor back gate bias is printed on the 012 nanoprocessor and R29 selected at the factory to supply this bias A schematic table lists possible values of R29 and the nanoprocessor back gate voltage delivered by each R29 value Replacement of your 012 would require replacement of R29 7 5 The features of the fast controller include an expanded instrument instruction set software and hardware incrementation of channels and signature analysis test capa bility throughout the controller and logic assemblies 7 E 6 The initial increment behavior and SA test routine are selected by switches 6 and 7 respectively on dip switch S1 Closing switch 6 initializes the 3495A in the IQ mode with the external increment capability disabled closing swit
242. iq jouueyg 101919 V 81 9 emt ANVdWOO QHV xovd l13 lMa3H 9461 iHOIMAdOO i ed 2 E 2 umm b Eos 1 ANIN m A em 1H913 s N3A3S a 1 XIS 1 BE E byt pid E p guo CD OML lt 3NO vxor A we c 1 0532 Qi Vie 90999 6680 KiHWaSSv 9516 SOLYALDY YN BLERA PP hr A HANNA a i i d A O gm M aaa A t eG Iv WO SNA AN IASIG ANIGSIG AV 8510 AY 45 6 S LINA SLINA SLINA S LINN S LINN S AINN 5 S LINA S LINO S LINA AR A AAA MM Ze ININ AA ARES EE 3 1 9 AV T3 a A nn a gt al A N3AdS Av 138 gt 1 XIS AYTAY A ante e 1 AWRY st i 3 1 uno3 gt A Y 338H1 NEM me OML AV 3H 1 AVAN Sel 1 0832 vm i a __ AAA Lm a rm rm rrr rara PIO ann am em Ta m obs i 12999 96
243. ith appropriate 2 6 Model 3495 packing material and seal well with strong tape or metal bands If the orignal container is not availabie proceed as follows a Wrap instrument in heavy paper or plastic before placing in an inner container b Place packing material around ali sides of instrument and protect panel face with cardboard strips or plastic foam c Place instrument and inner container in a heavy carton and seal with strong tape or metal bands d Mark shipping container DELICATE INSTRU MENT FRAGILE etc Model 3495 Section IH SECTION HI OPERATING 3 1 INTRODUCTION 3 2 This section describes the operation and control of the hp Model 3495A Scanner Keep in mind that the 3495A can only open and close relays The efficiency of the scanner is determined by how it s set up and program med and the system it s used in The versatility of the scanner necessitates discussion of hardware programming software control over the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus theory of operation and applications with specific controllers and channel options thorough understanding of these areas will help you determine the BEST way to set up and use the 3495A for your application 3 3 Turn On Make sure the rear panel line voltage selector switches are set for the proper 100 120 220 or 240 V configuration and the proper fuse is installed BEFORE turning the
244. l 1 1 7 3 1 4 ee wu mn so o Hs m h To e um p3 3 D LU 1 b 1 31 od T ES 5 3 Frei i 2 dea 1 The display will alsa indicate TEST IN PROGRESS f During the actual testing of each specific channel the con troller will determine if any of the relays in the channels under test are shorted A successful test would cause the program to print out poU rf 1 agni DO TEST i UF The program will then sequence to Test No 2 refer to Step for Test No 2 A shorted relay can be identified through the use of the Scanner Troubleshooting program If a shorted relay is detected during the tests the controller will print E F HTL URE SEES it PG i5 gt alim a FT E 71 Se TD striction 7 78 ele ain E SERRE RH inis subrautinz 151411 TE x 4 4 1 izolate the me mm i shorted rela Firzt Letts make harduare check in 1 Ut 1 i al fU iae 541 1 sted for good Connect lan Edas QUES LL lok X r 4 245 Connectors E i WE ER Ut F cs vt 1 TET pee YE _ my api dod pe 1
245. l also disables the delayed DC signal at U13B The execute signal also gates the DC signal through a logic delay determined by R14 x C8 The open timer OT signal performs several functions to the Ul6A close timer a Clears the unit s digit flip flop and clocks the ten s digit flip flop 012 and U10 respectively b Generates the opening flag OF signal to the controller assembly c Holds the delayed DC signal to the U16 close timer at Gate U13B d Clears the UISA decade close flip flop e Provides basic drive for the Q1 initially off relay coil drive current source 7 D 29 Clearing the relay select circuitry removes any current paths through the relay coils which causes all relays to open The gating at UI3B is common to all options in the 3495A Thus OF serves as a pacing signal to limit the transfer speed of channel data to the SLOWEST option installed with an open clear address NOTE This is important when mixed options are used and high speed capabil ity is expected Always remove any CLEAR addresses from slower options in this case 7 30 Holding the DC signal at U13 creates break before make synchronization by implementing the open timer interval before the close timer interval The decade close flip flop is cleared to re initialize the sequence and recharge C8 Q2 is initially on and serves as a steady state relay coil current source QI provides the transient or switching relay coil current at the beginning of the
246. l be tested for u valid number through 3j An incorrect input will cuuse the controller to display INCORRECT INPUT fhe Controller then prints the Reed Test Message again wilh remain in this loop until a valid input is received 7 20 re c The Controller then prints the test selected and instructs the operator to check the setting of the 10 position switch by printing IE q SIE LI a 4 een 4 1 i m je be iL wi 4 1 1 uu i EA Filles 1 Sind n 1 wi tims 0001 dee 1 COr pog ceo p pe Peet DI ru im podi piar i p 1 E E rd V oi P p T H Fal e we F Le El LUE SOLER SE a NOTE ff fest O is selected the program will terminate fhe Cni roller will dsp END OF TEST und print num Sus When the switches have been set the operator is asked to tinue the program from the display PRESS CONTINUE when ready d The operator input identifying a specific reed test will then cause the controfier to print one of the three printouts shown below ied p ca o TUN LAG BRET e de m 8 B 7 Gao Cu we vs Pom 1 ES N 1 T Pr bo E 1 1 F 4 T n arp d 7 eee mb FFE yn be v
247. l positioning of each pin Don t confuse these Supplement for 03495 30012 with the pin numbers and letters indicated on the blue cinch con nectors both P13 and 314 Page 7 C 13 Figure 7 12 Renumber the backside pins on P21A an the A21 component focator as shown here Page 7 D 10 Fable 7 0 1 The third part number in the A40R12 and 840 13 padding lists should have a 0698 prefix rather than a 0757 prefix BERRATA age 1 3 Table 1 1 Modify the Option 001 High to Low capaci ance specification with the channel closed Closed lt BO pF age 1 6 Paragraph 1 29 Change the part number of the Service Kit from 440954 03495 69800 age 7 9 Table 1 4 Delete the information on the 444195 90000 Operating Note and change the part number of the Operating Note or the Service Kit from 44095 90002 to 03495 69800 1 age 3 12 Table 3 6 The column applying ta the Algorithim step Increment four times should be shaded i Page 4 0 Table 4 1 Delete the hp 3455A DVM and substitute the 3403C DVM E Page 4 1 Paragraph 4 16 Change the relay select switch from a switch 1 bhp 3101 1236 to 3 position switch 1 thp 3101 1248 4 2 Figure 4 4 The wiring diagram for A14 Option 001 has B channels 5 8 wired incorrectly The correct wiring is shown here HIGH F LOW 9 P wenn Ow HIGH 2 6 LOW 2 d GUARD HIGH
248. lculators An hp Model 3490A Multimeter and a 9866A B Printer are also required for these programs For more information on the 44095A Service Kit refer to hp Operating Note Part Number 44095 90001 7 23 RELAY REPLACEMENT 7 24 The instructions in Service Groups B and C present a step by step procedure to replace a decade High Low Model 3495 Guard and or Actuator relay on the Scanner Relay Board assembly Instructions for replacing duo decade relays are in Service Group D 7 25 Signature Analysis 7 26 With Option 100 an additional servicing aid is included A signature analysis routine is stored on the A8 Assembly ROM More information on SA testing with Option 100 is included in Service Group E 7 27 Properly installed accessory option and a Listen address of are assumed throughout this section Adjust ments are normally not required after scanner servicing 7 28 Test Kit Options 001 Through 003 7 29 Two test kits are available as troubleshooting aids for isolating resistive or shorted relays The test kit 44195A can be used to locate faults on decade options Options 001 through 003 7 30 OPERATIONAL VERIFICATION 9830 CALCULATOR TEN CHANNEL OPTIONS 7 31 Description 7 32 The Scanner Verification Program selects the DMM OHMS function and measures the input resistance of the LOW THERMAL or ACTUATOR CHANNELS This deter mines if each relay in a particular channel do
249. lett Packard Company further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Bureau of Standards to the extent allowed by the Bureau s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members WARRANTY AND ASSISTANCE This Hewlett Packard product is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of shipment except that in the case of certain components if any listed in Section 1 of this operating manual the warranty shall be for the specified period Hewlett Packard will at its option repair or replace products which prove to be defective during the warranty period provided they are returned to Hewlett Packard and provided the proper preventive maintenance procedures as listed in this manual are followed Repairs necessitated by misuse of the product are not covered by this warranty NO OTHER WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE HEWLETT PACKARD IS NOT LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES If this product is sold as part of a Hewlett Packard integrated instrument system the above warranty shall not be applicable and this product shall be covered only by the system warranty Service contracts or customer assistance agreements are available for Hewlett Packard products For any assistan
250. ly is used by the 4 AS 10 and 40 assemblies Filtering is provided by and C3 regulation through the combined action of U1 and Qi is the current pass transistor and R9 in parallel with RIO provides current sensing for Q2 The full load output current is about 4 9 amperes at 25 C 7 10 An unregulated 10 volt supply is provided at the positive terminal of C1 on the Al mother board assembly This supply is used by the A5 and A6 display assemblies and is a source for the 2 5 volt regulated supply Check this supply voltage for approximately 10 volts with the 3495A cleared all channels open Model 3495A Model 3495 Reference Designation SERVICE GROUP A Section VH Table 7 A 1 Replaceable Parts Power Supply A2 and A100 HP Part Number 03495 6650E 0180 2566 0180 9408 9189 0582 1901 0200 1400 0507 1901 9200 1400 0507 1901 0028 1901 0200 1400 0507 1991 9200 1400 0507 03495 25501 1205 0033 1251 3750 251 1587 03495 66524 9180 0197 0150 9059 0180 0339 0150 0050 0180 0197 9180 0309 0150 0096 1901 0040 1901 0040 1302 3171 1902 3062 1902 0629 1854 9039 1954 4071 1354 0071 1854 9011 100 3273 9583 2725 0584 1031 9683 2715 9686 1021 0683 6825 0683 3025 0811 1662 4811 1659 2811 1659 0683 2705 0157 0392 0684 1001 0683 4725 0698 4444 0684 1921 0598 4471 9584 4721 0698 3151 0684 1031 0757 0407 1820 0223 1820 0196 03495 6
251. mmediately open all channels ASCH NUL and DEL characters are unconditionally ignored Spaces act as zeros or are ignored in instruction strings see instruction formatting Delimit ers serve to begin or end instruction fields NOTE The SDC and DCL commands and the instruction also return the 3495 to the Start up SA and 10 or Il mode as determined switches and 7 4851 3 10 Model 3495A 3 76 Further Special Characters Option 100 3 77 The special characters added by the A8 fast control ler are used to set bounderies on all increment behavior to suppress or implement the external implement capability or to generate a software controlled increment 3 78 An ASCII F preceding a channel number selects that channel as the first channel in the block An ASCH L preceding a channel number selects that channel as the last channel in the block After initializing F and L the ASCH characters and L can be used in place of the channel numbers 3 79 If the numerical value of F is less than the numerical value of the channels will increment If the numerical value of F is greater than the numerical value of L the channels will decrement Incomplete or illegal values for F L will not change them from their prior values 3 80 Channels increment or decrement into the block if the behavior of the incrementation or decrementation 15 towards the block If the beh
252. mments Scanner Must Be Listening With The In The Command Mode Scanner Must Be Listening Model 3495 MAMA gt ADDRESSING SCANNER titel TPP cl STEP ENTER CONTROLLER jl COMMANDS Section IH tate THE ESTABLISH THE SEND THE SEND COMMAND COMMUNICATION THE DATA THE MODE PATH COMMANDS INSTRUCTIONS Figure 3 3 3495A Scanner Programming Model 3 65 In the Data mode a listening 3495A can be instruct ed to close and open channels or receive instructions to be triggered in the Command mode With the 8 fast con troller Option 100 the 3495A can increment or decre ment through a selectable block of channels under software or external control This behavior is programmed by specially handled characters within the 3495A instruction set Table 3 5 lists the set of 3495A instructions in the Data mode 3 66 A programming model for the 3495A Scanner is shown in Figure 3 3 Steps in an algorithm are performed by programming the Scanner in compliance with the basic sequence summarized in the model The basic sequence a Enter the Command mode LOW b Address controller to Talk Scanner to Listen estab lish the communication path NOTE Sending the unlisten address ASCH prior to the Talk and Listen address as is advised to eliminate unwanted listeners S
253. ms 3 j t E D j NOTE The Special Key Function programs should also be loaded into the tf this has not already been done This may be done by pres sing E FIER BF ee aa A E j i fart s TE Jo No teh d 4 Xo cu og oe Then oe OF LINE A Section After the tape has stopped press 4 Obtain a listing of the program by pressing m mmt e Remove the listing from the printer f Repeat Steps b through e to obtain a listing for the 3495A Scanner Troubleshooting Program located on File 5 g Refer to the System Configuration Sheet for the ad dress of the 3495 A you are modifying the program for h Make the changes required to edit the program on the printout you just obtained using the information below Line 440 CMD U IL Listen Change the Listen address to the new character Line 1040 Change the Listen address to the new character CMD U L Listen 3495 SCANNER TROUBLESHOOTING PROGRAM Line 310 CMPD Li y Listen Change the Listen address to the new character Line 700 CMD Uy Change the Listen address to the new character Listen i It will also be necessary to modify the Func tion Program To obtain a listing press a 7 j Remove the listing from the printer k Make the changes required to edit the program on the pr
254. n lt 15pF lt 15pF lt 350 pF Closed lt 15 pF 25pF lt 400 pF Interchannel Capacitance inter Inter Inter Inter Opt 001 Opt 002 Opt 004 Channel Channel Channel Channel lt 12pF lt 12pF lt 10 H to H H to H or or A to A A to A Worst Case Channels High to Low m Option 001 97 4 DOE MT NEED Option 004 3 7 11 15 19 nA to Ba Option 002 0 9 interchannel Option 001 4 to 3 9 to 8 Option 002 O to 1 9 to 8 Option 004 L to L to L 3 to 2 or or 7 to 6 B to B B to B 11 to 10 15 to 14 19 to 18 Closed For Measurement DEDEMORIARICE PAD I Frequency Response 10 kHz Reference 50 2 Load PERFORMANCE TEST CARD Cont d OPTION 001 Channel Ratio Channel Ratio iChannei Channel Ratio Up to 100 kHz x 3dB hui ANIME ARIA Up to 1 MHz 5 dB iii iiim reU eee MM 1 2 eii iiid OPTION 002 Up to 100 kHz 3dB Uem 00 Ane ee Up to 1 MHz 5 OPTION 004 Up to 1 MHz 2dB Worst Case Channels Option 001 9 4 Option 002 0 9 Option 004 3 7 11 15 19 Test Limits Ratio OPTION 001 i Freq Hz Lower Upper 100 9660 1 0351 10 K Reference 50 9660 1 0351 106 K 9660 1 0351 500 9440 1 0593 1M 9440 1 0593 OPTION 002 Freq Hz Lower
255. n of performance The performance should be tested as part of the incoming inspection _ 4 10 PERFORMANCE TEST FAILURE 4 11 If the 34954 fails any of the performance tests refer to Section VII for troubleshooting information Shorted open or resistive relays will cause failures in the 9825A based performance tests NOTE shorted or out of sequence relay may cause test failures on a series of channels If a test does indicate a series of faults check the last good channel as weil as the faulty ones 4 12 SWITCHING TIME TEST 4 13 Specifications 4 13 a The following specifications are verified in this test Opt 001 amp 003 Opt 002 Opt 004 amp 005 lt 40 msec lt 10 msec lt I msec 4 14 Description 4 15 This test verifies that the 3495A Scanner can switch channels within the specified time Some theory behind this test may help In general the test incrementally stepschan nels through a 20 to 1 or a 10 to 1 voltage divider at the maximum switching rate of the option storing the measure ments on each channel The test requires an option 100 control board to provide the specified incrementation speed A fast sampling voltmeter hp 3437A is required to take the measurements and provide increment pulses delay out The controller requires some form of fast data storage equivalent to the switching rate being tested An hp 9825A Calculator using a type 3 high speed 1 0 buffer is the recommended c
256. nal Data Clear signal in many states of the Control State Machine it resets the Data Storage flip flops to the ASCII character DEL which is a no operator character for the 3495 The control signal IFC _ also gives Data Clear signal when it unaddresses the 3495A this is to prevent addressing when the last character sent on the HP IB and stored in U6 and 012 was the 3495 Listen address 7 23 HANDSHAKE BLOCK 7 24 Each character received by the 3495A during either HP IB operating mode is done so with a three line handshake technique in which the 3495A and other listeners control the NRFD and NDAC lines and the HP IB talker controls the DAV line The sequence follows 3495A sets NRFD false and NDAC true indicating that it is ready for data b HP IB talker puts an ASCII character on the seven data lines and sets DAV true 3495A sets NRFD true and NDAC false and stores the data character d HP IB talker sets DAV false allowing the 3495A to set NRFD false and NDAC true to indicate readiness for the next data character as in Step 1 The Basic Handshake sequence is illustrated in Figure 3 2 in Section General HP IB Programming 1 25 Not Ready For Data 7 A 26 The Not Ready For Data handshake signal is defined in Figure 7 5 MMMM Model 3495A LVL A Sil lHgW3ssv 2907 OpY 40 IWASSHL MOT OL
257. nal from U11 becomes the least significant bit and thus determines whether the state number will be odd or even NSQ H goes high to give an odd state number and route the state machine from state 01 to 03 04 to 05 or 06 to 07 when the 3495A has been addressed and its relays are not in the process of opening or closing NSQ H is low to allow the 01 to 02 state change when the 3495A is addressed it also holds the state machine in states 04 and 06 while relays are Opening or closing 7 A 41 When the HP IB is in the Data mode and the 3495A is addressed the Not Ready For Data NRFD handshake line is held true low by Conditional Bus Hold CBH signal until the state machine enter state 30 20 or 10 Then CBH goes false allowing NRFD to go false so that a new ASCII character may be received A complete handshake cycle occurs If the received character gives a no operator code at the Data Next State ROM the state machine remains in state 30 20 or 10 and another character is received on a handshake cycle If the character is a valid character the state machine goes to state X1 4 X6 or X7 X 3 2 or 1 and CBH goes true again 7 42 See the descriptions of NRFD Enable I and NRFD Enable II for the circum stances when CBH is overridden to allow data characters to be sent on the HP IB while the 3495A is not in state 30 20 or 10 7 A 43 DECADE MANAGEMENT BLOCK 7 44 The Decade Management block contains the five signals
258. ne HR Model 3495 Section sories Refer to the appropriate service group if servicing in these areas is required Table 1 3 Service Group Descriptions Description Option Accessory Basic Scanner Low Thermal Decade Option Or Reference Connector Duo Decade Option Stendard 001 44401A 003 44403A 5 2 7 A 5 M Actuator Decade Option 002 44402A Low Thermal Duo Decade Option 004 44404A Or Reference Connector Duo Decade 005 44405A Option Fast Controller Option Includes SA Testing 100 44413A Figure 1 3 Field Installable Thermocouple Decade Reference Junction Assembly synchronization is possible for up to five scanners con nected mthe manier Service groups contain information for use only by trained service personnel Attempts to 1 33 Individual terminal assemblies are available as service the scanner by other than trained SEEGE personnel may result in personal injury and or follows damage to the scanner 03495 64101 Low Thermal Decade 03495 64102 Actustot Decade 1 39 Operating and programming information is contained es 03495 64103 Thermocouple Decade in the first five 5 sections of the manual Refer to these 03495 64114 Low Merai Duo Decidi sections for information regarding setting up and using the iil 03495 64115 Thermocouple Duo Decade Model 3495A
259. ng Rate Deiay Output Compatible To 1 MHz Compatible Network Analyzer 4 19 Controller Capability High Speed 1 0 21 msec measurement Options 001 003 Option 002 lt 40 msec Options 004 amp 005 lt 1 msec Automatic Synthesizer To 1 MHz Compatible Dual Channel Reference amp Test Suagested hp Mode 9825A 3437A lt 10 msec PERFORMANCE TEST CARD Hewlett Packard Model 3495A Test Performed By Date Instrument Serial No ee Test Results Option Option ion Option Specification Address Address Switching Time Option 007 Pass Pass Pass Pass rre Option 002 Fail Fail Fail Option 003 Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Channels Channels Channels Channels Option 004 Option 008 PERFORMANCE TEST CARD Cont d Thermal Offset Option 001 lt 2 uM Voitage Option 002 lt 30 uV Option 003 lt 2 uV Option 004 lt 1 uV Option 005 lt 1 Channet isolation Option 001 Option 003 Option 004 Option 005 PERFORMANCE TEST CARD Cont d Specification gt 101 gt 10 9 d _ o n m P Test Capacitance CLOFUNIMAWODL EJI LAND UHL Specification High to Low H to L H to L or or or A to B Capacitance A to B A to B Opt 001 Opt 002 Opt 004 Ope
260. ns or shorts Observe the three hour thermal settling time for temperature measurements Observe other specifications operating information 7 10 TROUBLESHOOTING TREES 7 11 Troubleshooting information for scanner faults related to the A4 A20 and 40 Assemblies is located in Service Groups A B C and D respectively 7 12 ACCESS FOR SERVICING 7 13 Access to most areas of the instrument may be gained by removing the top cover To remove the A5 or displays the front panel must be removed by loosening the four securing screws on the horizontal tabs behind the panel The location of the securing screws is shown in Figure 2 2 in Section H Installation A single screw secures each display assembly Be sure the line voltage switch is in the OFF position when removing or installing scanner assemblies 7 14 Access to the interface and control assembly be obtained with the use of the extender board hp Part Number 03495 66507 supplied with the 3495A The Inter 7 2 Model 3495A face and Control assembly and the existing connector must be removed first The A4 or 8 assembly can be removed from the back of the 3495A by removing the two screws that secure the assembly to the 3495 Chassis With the 4 or 8 assembly removed the Connector assem bly can be removed from the top of the scanner 7 15 Fit the extender board into the JIA connector and install the A4 or A8 Inte
261. nts and relay configur ations for Actuator decades are shown in Figure 7 13 of Service Group Actuator channels are arranged ten per option a decade and consist of two sets of normaily open contacts with four terminals per channel Actuator channels are not sequenced and any number of channels per decade may be closed at the same time NOTE The Scanner exhibits maximum switching time of 40 msec with clear addresses installed into this option 3 15 Closed Actuator channels are indicated by the chan nel numbers displayed on the decade s display The Actua tor display consists of a ten s channel digit and correspond ing unit s channel LED s An Actuator display is shown in Figure 2 3 of Section 3 16 Low Thermal Duo Decades Options 004 and 005 3 17 The channel terminal assignments and relay config urations for the duo decade options are shown in Figure 7 D 9 of Service Group D Low thermal duo decades are twenty to one multiplexers with one set of common ter minals Signals are multiplexed to the common terminals one at a time in a break before make sequence This means that a previously closed channel in a decade opens before the new channel closes 3 18 The duo decade options provide for operation of the full 80 channel capacity of the 3495A Synchronous opera tion and selectable relay open and close timers allow for burst channel closures of more than 1000 per second A high speed DVM with a reading r
262. o the A22 Relay Assemblies Be sure that all assemblies are firmly in place Clean handling techniques are required when handling the 444014 printed circuit assembly NOTE Installation of the Relay Assemblies locks the Logic Assemblies into place until removal of the respective Relay Assemblies i Replace the front panel top cover and door 2 36 INTERFACE CONNECTION 2 37 Connect each 3495A to the Hewlett Packard Inter face Bus at the rear panel jack 2 38 Figure 2 4 shows the pin configuration of the HP IB connector on the 34954 Scanner 2 39 The maximum total length of HP IB cable in any system must not exceed 20 meters or 2 meters per device whichever is less CONNECT TO RTH GROUND TYPE G7 MICROAIBION CONNECTOR Figure 2 4 Connector ho t Un Section 2 40 REPACKAGING FOR SHIPMENT NOTE If the instrument is to be shipped to Hewlett Packard for service or repair attach a tag to the instrument identifying the owner and indicating the service or repair to be accomplished Include the model number and full serial number of the instrument any correspon dence identify the instrument by model num ber and full serial number If you have any questions contact your nearest hp Sales and Service Office 2 41 The following is a general guide for repackaging the instrument for shipment the original container is availa ble place the instrument in the container w
263. om GUARD Ow 3 qe we GEARED 2 Page 2 nenn HIGH COM mn en MA LOW Be GUARD COM PORN MANUAL CHANGES IF TALENT FF 1 4 3 Figure 4 2 The 3 position Relay Select switch is tied to A the DVM input only one type High Low Guard 78 relays are checked in any given position Page 4 5 Figure 4 4 The DC Nuli Voltmeter leads to High Band Low common terminals Options 001 003 004 005 or Band B terminals Option 002 Page 4 5 Paragraph 4 27 Change the relay select switch from a switch 1 hp 3101 1235 to 3 position switch 1 Chp 23101 13481 Step a Delete the sentence Use the proper value for as shown in Table 4 2 Step d Add this sentence Do not test channel on Options 003 or 005 since that channel contains a thermistor from High to Low Page 4 6 Figure 4 6 The DMM is used in this set up merely to E monitor the change and measure modes of the HIGH RESISTANCE E METER and may be deleted if desired z Page 4 6 Paragraph 4 29 Modify the Option 001 High to Low cap acitance specification with the channel closed to be Closed lt BO pF a Page 4 7 Paragraph 4 31 When making capacitance measurements B minimize lead lengths to the measurement terminals Because of B differences in the options the capacitance specifications are derived Bsomewhat differently for each
264. ontroller for this test 4 16 Test Procedure EQUIPMENT REQUIRED 3495A Option 100 Accessory 44413A Calculator hp 9825A w General amp Extended Digital Voltmeter hp 3437A HP IB Card hp 98034A 10 or 20 1 8 watt 1 1 resistors hp 0757 0280 DPDT switch 1 hp 3101 1235 a Connect the test setup as shown in Figure 4 2 u c Cycle through the channels to be tested at the spec ified switching speed and store the measurements 4 Model 3495 HAL iL YING HOLINS 123136 Di e ERASE 952051 TINA 8 00 NOI LdO Ey ms ES qa pian 3591 195110 puw au Duryojims 71 aanbid 500 8 700 SNOLLdO SvV Cum Uu 00 NOILdO Viv e 6 O gt E u 6 ve 8 MOT ES 2 8910 gt Gung g 4 9 9 S ADT evr WO e i it SSH P mans gt HSIN 5555 el Ai om y MO aR E HOI 2 2 HHAH HHH I lt 4 2 Model 3495 The de supply should be adjusted as follows Options 001 002 amp
265. or is used to monitor the temperature of the environment This value is then used to adjust thermocouple voltages to compensate for the connector reference temperature The adjusted voltages can then be transferred into accurate temperature measurements The connector and the compensation procedure are discussed in Section HI Applications 7 B 3 Information in this service group is presented as follows a Low Thermal Decade Theory of Operation b Servicing Aids Servicing Procedures d Service Material A10 THEORY OF OPERATION Refer to Figure 7 B 8 7 B 4 DECADE ADDRESS BLOCK 7 5 Jumper wires placed in the Decade Close Address and Decade Clear Address circuits determine which digits from 0 to 7 accepted by the 3495A as ten s channel digits activate address the given Low Thermal Logic assembly For a Close address the Decade Select signal from A4 gives the Ten s Display Store Unit s Store and Decade Enable signals Similarly for a Clear address the Decade Select signal gives the Unit s Clear and Decade Enable signals A Clear address overrides a Close address The Decades Clear signal from A4 functions identically to a Decade Select signal via a Clear address jumper aed A Maa ia a PP UNIT S DIGIT m m TTE ES RELAY amp DISPLAY DISPLAY DIGIT STORAGE Sb DISPLAY DIGITS TSi 183 M i AS RELAY CONTROL TO ARS Fz ES HI
266. ou CL dom m fi m You are now ready to test the desired instrument Simply press i A NOTE Since this is a new program it will not be listed on the Verification Program Instruction Index If you desire to have the Instruction Program available in your new cassette follow the same instructions for program editing and store the revised program in the selected file number 7 45 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 46 It is improbable that more than one or two relays will be resistive or shorted at the same time An occurrence 7 10 3495 of this type usually means that another problem exists Typical problems that may cause this condition are listed below a Poor connection of the edge connector between the Decade Assembly and Scanner To correct this first remove the Test Fixture then the Decade Assembly in question Reinsert the assembly Make sure that it is well seated into the Scanner b Poor connection between the Decade Assembly and the Test Fixture Remove the Test Fixture and reinsert NOTE The Actuator assembly is more likely to have this condition Poor connection between the Test Fixture Plug and the female connector on the rear of the 3490A Check the tightening ring on the plug to insure it is turned fully clock wise The plug may have to be removed and reconnected FRONT REAR input switch on the front panel the 3490A set to FRONT Set the switch to REAR
267. ough the rear door System orientated operational verif ication tests are included in Section Troubleshooting Aids NOTE Performance tests for the hp Model 3495A Scanner can be performed in any order The sequence described for each performance test must be followed to obtain valid test results 4 3 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED 4 4 Testing all 3495A option channels throughout the entire set of specifications can be time consuming For this reason the performance test procedures given in this section are shown for representative worst case where possible channels using minimum equipment configurations The section ends with some suggestions on automating the 3495A performance test process and suggested equipment for such a process 4 5 Table 4 1 lists the recommended equipment for testing the 3495A Scanner performance against specifications If the recommended equipment is not available use substitute equipment that has required capabilities 4 6 PERFORMANCE TEST CARD 4 7 A Performance Test Card is provided at the end of this section for your convenience in recording the performance of the 3495A during performance tests This card can be removed from the manual and used as a permanent record of the incoming inspection or of a routine performance test The Performance Test Card may be reproduced with out written permission from Hewlett Packard 4 8 CALIBRATION CYCLE 4 9 The 3495A does not require periodic verificatio
268. placement assemblies or parts address your order or inquiry to the nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office Identify assemblies and parts by their hp Part Numbers Include the instrument model and serial 6 4 Tables containing the following information on replaceable parts for each assembly are listed in the Service Group where the assembly is found number a hp Part Number 6 7 Non Listed Parts b Total quantity used in the instrument Qty column The total quantity of a part is given the first time the part 6 8 To obtain a part that is not listed in the service groups number appears include c Description of the part See Table 6 1 for abbrevia a Instrument model number tions b Instrument serial number qe 4 Typical manufacturer of the part is five digit code Description of the part See Table 6 2 for list of manufacturers d Function and location of the part Table 6 1 Standard Abbreviations ABBREVIATIONS silver 2 hertz cycles per sacand negative positiva zero ee eae slide Alia atuminum zero temperature SPDT single pole double throw Bou a eite dta abo NO ampere JD Loco yas xa RC Ce inside diameter AS nanosecond s 109 seconds 5 single pote single thraw i aa ee MR Ampl vs sse xev ur rn
269. pour the pre heated distilled water into the bottom of the washer Note that if too much Alco Zyme is used several rinses may be necessary 12 If an oven is available dry the boards in an up right position at 150 F for 3 hours Otherwise use the dry cycle the dishwasher twice 13 After drying and while the board is still warm coat the repaired areas with one of the recom mended dry film products NOTE Make certain that you wear cotton gloves when handling the boards Section VII 7 14 ABBREVIATIONS AND SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS manual 7 75 Table 7 6 and Figure 7 6 list the abbreviations and Table 7 6 Abbreviations American Standard Code for Information Attention Clock Data Valid Direct Control 4 6 Data Input Out Device Select Non End or Identify External Flip Flop Ground Hewlett Packard interface Bus interface Clear interrupt Acknowledge Interrupt Enable INT REQ Interrupt Request ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY REFERENCE ASSEMBLY PART NUMBER DESIGNATION NAME INCLUDES 4241 SUBASSEMBLY JACK 2 18 MOUNTED O CHASSIS OR ANOTHER ASSEMBLY B PLUG Pi IS MOUNTED ON ASSEMBLY OR IS P grrr THE ASSEMBLY BOARD COMPLETE DESIGNATOR IS e 5 15 NOT MOUNTED M R3 TEST VOLTAGE ON 2 ASSEMBLY COMPLETE DESIGNATOR 15 pra COMPLETE DESIGNATOR 15 4284 i Je e SUBASSEMBLY OF A2 p INDICATES Ai PIN OF XA2 AND PI I 924 RI R2 WIRE COLOR C
270. r sin 5591 opeoop Surpuodsoil0 uononijsur SUS Y ssoipp oso Surpuodsouoo euis 09126 e paloys uoy sr sty sout Yysnoiy T IG uo sn 03 3U pues py 95180 0120235 IO AG 3181 pouugqo suo pi eAur oy seouanbas 8 pue 5319 Areurg qua sdoy dyy pajoofes s e ewp eui 2219891 Aq oy jo sKeja1 fe suado sdop d1 2881038 SHUN ST JO pueAut UV 91 9 aq 0 SARTO 24 JO SISQUIRU JO 591015 295 9 QIN 109125 ALJA sin Ul 1 pue AQ ST 3181 OUURYO mou 761 204 SLUT 5 IU 18 67 03 st 3181 Aejdstp 5 9161 ui peusis 19450611 ou jo sanisod uo 9f pue orn 03 sdop dig pue LIN LIN AR won peuejsugn SI 9INSOJO 103 s oi JO uoneurquioo sdo rdig OTM 104409 Aey eui Aq pay oq opeoop JO s Avjor us ay Jo 1equmu Auy ppo 19079 10H1N02 AV13U L2 L 0518 5902 9814 UUM Q 3121 0 SUINJOI SUTYORU 21615 OY SOI 91
271. r GET or clear DCL and SDC the 3495A in the Command mode The 9825A special command statements are shown in Table 1 8 7 HP IB Data Mode 8 Channels are programmed by instructions sent while the HP IB is in the Data mode Instructions can be sent as literal instruction strings variables or channel numbers Literal instructions are used when channel numbers are constant in a program Computed instructions are used when channel numbers are to be variable dependent on prior ENT RED RDB RDS statements or computations The 9825A instruction methods are listed in Table B 4 8 9 Literal instructions B 10 The Instructions term is a literal string of instruc Table 1 98254 Command Methods ROM Needed 10 7 Q Extended Addressing 10 cmd 7 420 Extended 10 wrt 709 General I O Command From Table B 2 Special 10 trg 709 Group Execute Trigger GET Extended Command 10 cir 7 Device Clear DCL Extended 1 0 Statements 10 cir 709 Selected Device Clear SDC Extended Table 2 Commands Command 2107 2101 Selected Device Ciear Group Execute Trigger GET Device Clear DCL 0000100 My Listen Address MLA Table3 1 Table3 1 Table 3 1 Unlisten Address UNL 20111111 Decimal Comments Scanner Must Be Listening With The HP 1B in The Command
272. rating Note for hp 3495A Option 003 amp Accessory 44403A Operating Note for hp 3495A Option 004 amp Accessory 44404A Operating Note for hp 3495A Option 005 amp Accessory 44405A Operating Note for 3495A Option 100 amp Accessory 44413A Operating Note for hp 3495A Service Kit 44095A B Operating Note for hp 3495A Test Kit 44195A Part Note for hp 3495A Reference Junction Connector 03495 64103 supplied with Option 003 Section and service aids can be obtained through your local hp Sales and Service Office Appendix C lists hp offices by location Table 1 4 Support Documentation Document Type amp Brief Description 1 9 1 10 d 7 22 3495 Section SECTION 2 1 INITIAL INSPECTION 2 2 This instrument was carefully inspected both mechan ically and electrically before shipment It should be free of mars or scratches and in perfect electrical order upon receipt To confirm this the instrument should be inspec ted for physical damage incurred in transit 1f the instru ment was damaged in transit file a claim with the carrier Check for accessories supplied Section D If there is damage or deficiency see the warranty in the front of this manual 2 3 POWER REQUIREMENTS 2 4 The Model 3495A can be operated from any power source supplying 100 V 120 V 220 V or 240 10 5 48 Hz to 66 Hz
273. re not sure which assem bly is in the location you have selected you may determine the correct fixture by matching the connectors of the Fixture and the Decade Channel Assembly 7 3 Section VIL 5 Connect the Cinch Connector of the Test Fixture Cable hp Part No 03495 61605 to the Fixture and the Plug to the rear of the 3490A Multimeter Set the 3490A and 3495 POWER switches to ON and insert the 3495A 9830A Test Cassette hp Part No 44195 10001 into the Controller cas sette transport b Verification Program Instructions 7 4 1 Before the Verification Program is run you should load the Verification Program Instructions onto the keyboard To do this Press men gx ii CERT then 4j il bt Ms M When the tape has stopped moving press IN iud Ld NOTE Load the Special Functions routine before loading the Scanner Verification Check as Shown in Step 2 The Scanner Verification Program requires the use of the Special Function Keys Load the Special Function Key program by pressing uA god A CN Met octies IT E vl E E O Zu BM E wire When the tape has stopped load the 3495A Scan nerOperational Verification Check by pressing m When the tape has press i rz m 4 07 FF mm 3 Follow the instructions listed by the printer The 3495A Scanner Verification
274. rface and Control assembly onto the extender board The Interface and Control assembly can now be easily accessed for servicing and troubleshoot ing procedures 7 18 OVERALL TROUBLESHOOTING 7 17 If the 3495A Scanner power supplies are operational the remaining apparent 3495A malfunctions can be broken down into four general categories a Listen addressing of the scanner Service Group A or E b Decade or duo decade addressing of the scanner Service Groups B C and D c Defective relays Service Group C or D d Malfunctions elsewhere in the scanner Appropriate Service Group 7 18 Malfunctions elsewhere in the scanner are most likely the result of poor assembly connections Look for repeat ability of the malfunction With firm knowledge of the faults repeatability malfunctions can easily be isolated down to a service group and board 7 19 TROUBLESHOOTING AIDS 7 20 Service Kit 7 21 The 44095 Service Kit is designed to facilitate on site isolation and repair of failures in the hp Model 3495A Scanner with Options 001 002 or 003 By substi tuting one or more of the six pre tested PC assemblies in malfunctioning 3495A and running the appropriate diag nostic programs board level malfunctions can be easily and quickly located The troubleshooting trees preceding each schematic can be used to isolate component failures 7 22 The Service Kit contains diagnostics for hp Model 9830A B and 9825A Ca
275. round 2 10 Additional safety ground points are provided at the four tapped 6 32 holes at the rear corners of the instru ment 2 11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 2 12 For the 3495A to meet the specifications listed in Table 1 1 the operating temperature must be within the range of 0 to 55 32 to 131 F Additional environmental conditions for Option 003 are explained in Section IH Applications Temperature Measurements The storage temperature range with any option is from 40 C to 70 C 10 F to 158 The rear door should be kept closed to reduce heat transfer 2 13 INSTALLATION 2 14 Bench Use 2 15 The Model 34954 is shipped with plastic feet which are shaped to permit the instrument to be placed on top of other full module Hewlett Packard instruments 2 16 Rack Mounting 2 17 The Model 3495 may be rack mounted using the rack mount kit Option 908 part number 5061 0078 The rack mount is an EIA standard width of 19 inches height is 7 inches When rack mounted additional support must be provided at the rear of the instrument 2 18 INSTALLATION OF OPTIONS 2 19 Table 2 1 lists the factory installed locations and address values for the 3495 A channel options 2 20 Options 001 002 003 004 005 and 100 are avail able as field installable accessories Before installation of these accessories review Section IM Hardware Program ming and Applications for some considerations and e
276. s 7 B 15 7 B 13 Relay 7 B 15 7 B 14 Removing the High Low Relay 7 B 16 7 B 15 High Low Relay Retaining Screw LOCATION re 7 16 7 B 16 High Low Relay Removed from Ihe ASSEIOBIV Au Lea qe gale 7 B 17 7 B 17 Relay Wiring Diagram 7 B 17 7 B 18 Guard Relay Removed 7 B 18 7 19 5 Component Locator 7 B 21 7 B 22 7 B 20 A13 Component Locator 7 21 7 22 7 B 21 Low Thermal Channel Display AS A11 thru 14 24 7 21 7 22 vi Figure Page Tul Seno Group nia LEA E APPS 7 1 7 C 2 Actuator Block 747 2 7 C 3 Actuator State Diagram 7 3 7 4 7 4 Actuator Decades Troubleshooting TEE IANS 7 5 7 6 7 C 5 Test Procedure Flowchart OU es Geek A 7 7 7 8 7 6 A20 Component Locator 7 9 7 10 7 C 7 A20 Block 7 9 7 10 7 C 8 Actuator Logic 20 7 9 7 10 7 9 Actuator Relay Locator 7 11 7 C 10 Actuator Relay Removed from the Board Assembly 70 11 7 C 11 A6 Component Locator 7 13 7 14 7 12 21 Component Locator 7 13 7 14 7 13 Actuator Channel Display AO AISA A29 ev RA 7 C 13 7 C 14 7 0 1 Service Group D uuu 7 D 1 7 D 2 A40 Timing R
277. s the state machine through its six states in a timing loop to sequence relay opening and closing The high low and guard relays of one channel are held closed or all the relays of the decade are held open in state 3 until Decade Execute the Ist Qualifier goes true at which time the state machine is advanced by the Relay Clock through all of its states and returns to state 3 The previously closed high low relay opens in state 2 the previously closed guard relay opens in state 0 the new guard relay closes in state 6 and the new high low relay closes in state 7 The ten s display digit may change in state 4 if the decade is wired for multiple Close addresses and the unit s display may change in state 6 7 13 The Decade Execute signals of all 10 assemblies are buffered and wired together as an OR function to develop the Relay Opening Flag signal Relay Opening Flag is the 2nd Qualifier it may go false and allow the state machine to advance to state 6 only when the Decade Execute signal of each 10 assembly is made false by Decade Disable in state 4 This ensures break before make operation Relay Opening Flag is true during states 2 and 0 each 10 assembly but may be true somewhat before or after this interval on a particular assembly since the clocks are not synchronized 7 14 Relay Closing Flag is sent to A4 to hold the Control State Machine in state 06 to allow time for relay closing It is a wired OR function derived from t
278. sensing thermistor A metal shield encloses the assemblies and forms a baffle which limits temperature variations due to convection while providing an entry point and strain relief for thermo couple wires The temperature difference between channels is also minimized Option 003 connectors employ an iso thermal enclosure to minimize the temperature gradient while option 005 connectors employ PC cladding Guard connections are provided for all inputs to improve com mon mode rejection in floating measurement configura tions Two sets of HIGH LOW and GUARD common terminals are also available on the connectors 3 119 SOURCES OF ERROR ACCURACY 3 120 The accuracy of the Scanner is dependent on the environment it is placed in A static steady state environ ment occurs exclusively where the ambient and thus the scanner temperature varies no more than 1 C hr A dynam ic environment occurs where temperature varies no more than 5 C hr 1 C to 5 change in scanner temperature could occur when moving the scanner from a hot automo bile trunk to a ventilated office A 5 C hour change in scan ner temperature could occur when the heating system is turned on for a work day in an office building If both occur simultaneously stated accuracies will apply either condition is exceeded the specifications will not apply until after the scanner has equalized with its environ ment The thermal time constant of the hp Model 3
279. tall the connector into the scanner 3495A Option 100 Accessory 44413A d Increment the scanner to the channel you wish to Digital Multimeter hp 3455A High Resistance Meter hp 4329A DPDT Switch 2 Chp 3101 1235 test Set the high resistance meter controls as follows a Connect the test setup as shown in Figure 4 6 Use the proper value for Rg as shown in Table 4 2 FUNCTION LLL RESISTANCE al A AN AAA AN O mn TO SELECT SWITCHES 1 amp 2 SELECT SWITCHES 1 amp 2 A45 amp 46 14 OPTIONS 004 amp 005 OPTION 001 Figure 4 5 Channel Isolation Test Wiring Diagrams 4 5 JCUCLIOH EY REFER TO FIGURE 4 5 FOR WIRING DIAGRAMS 0 EXTERNAL SCANNER INCREMENT hp 34954 SWEET CH A EXT INC iN HO d ox LOW THERMAL L CONNECTIONS T GC 8 HIGH RESISTANCE METER hyp 43794 Model 3495 DMM he 34554 0000 d d o Qc ab on gb educ oo Figure 4 6 Channel Isolation Test Setup MODE DISCHARGE TEST VOLTAGE 25 VOLTS X10 Option 002 X10 Others f Select the isolation you wish to test with switches S1 and 52 g After the high resistance meter has stabilized set the mode switch to charge h Allow several seconds for the meter circuitry to charge Then set the mode switch to measure 1 Record the isolation resistanc
280. terchannel capacitances are made between channel input terminals with one low thermal options or both actuator option channel s closed 4 33 FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST 4 34 Specifications 4 34 a The following specifications are verified in this test Frequency Response 10 kHz reference 50 ohm load Option 001 Up to 100 kHz 0 3 dB Up to 1 MHz 0 5 dB Option 002 Up to 100 kHz 0 3 dB Up to 1 MHz 0 5 dB 2 REFER TO FiGUng 4 7 i GUARD s FOR WIRING DIAGRAMS LOW OR B HIGH QA V SCANNER EXTERNAL 3495 INCREMENT S NETCH 1 Model 3495 A Option 004 Up to 1 MHz 0 20 dB 4 35 Description 4 36 This test verifies that the scanner s frequency response is within the specified range Channels can be closed by an external increment input closure to ground A momentary contact switch can serve to make these closures Low thermal measurements are made from the connector COMMON terminals Actuator channel measure ments are made on individual channels Worst case channels for this test are OUT 9 4 UU aa aC ip 0 9 Upton ee a ad 12 219 Measurements on these channels should be conclusive 4 37 Test Procedure EQUIPMENT REQUIRED 3495A Option 100 Accessory 44413A Test Oscillator hp 652A Digital Multimeter hn 34554 50 ohm Termination hp 11048C BNC BNC Cable 2 hp 11170A BNC Banana Adapter
281. terrupt phase 7 E 26 The increment routine automatically determines the first incremental channel number dependent on the present first and last channel values and sends the data to the logic assembly The clear signal is then initialized and the open flag checked 40 assembly in the open timer interval 7 27 When the relays have opened the relay opening flag goes high and the nano processor determines the next incremental channel 7 H 28 The relay closing flag goes high at the end of the close timer interval signifying that the selected relay has closed The nanoprocessor then returns to the main control program 7 E 29 The external increment routine allows the 3495A to change channels without performing the HP IB handshake sequence The power up external increment capability of the fast controller eliminates the need to program this capability The scanner need not be listening i 1 30 SIGNATURE ANALYSIS TESTS 7 31 Four signature analysis routines are stored on the 8 read only memory These four routines are used to generate recurring data throughout the 3495A control logic and display assemblies With the use of an hp Model 5004A Signature Analyzer this data can be interpreted as characteristic signatures and compared to factory values To implement the SA tests close switch 7 on the listen address dip switch Upon turn on the nanoprocessor will initialize the first SA test routine 7 31 SAG R
282. the 3495A to the current first channel if headed away from the first chan nel Otherwise the 3495A will increment decrement to it Example F30 L35 40E The first S jumps to channel 30 F30 L35 20E Increments from 20 into the de fined block upon increment signals 2341 Section Model 3495 A Table 3 6 Implementing The Algorithm Example NAAA Clear the Scanner Clase Channels 21 and 31 1 2 Send the Scanner the Clear instruction and the Close Channel 22 and 32 instructions Trigger the Scanner to execute the previous instructions Increment four times 1792745 Camimends Step 3 Algorithm Step Necessary Model Steps ASCH Command BS 7711 2 4 0 podre Complete Program Sequence Instructions Comments Step 5 The addressing in Step 2 is necessary for the DCL command but is needed in subsequent steps 2 1 and 2 are not necessary but are advised to insure that only wanted talkers and listeners are on the bus 2232 Steps 1 2 and 4 be omitted as described above An end of line carriage return must be suppressed to prevent immediate execution gom 2 may be omitted as described above 88885 Advised 1 gt 23 gt 12 gt 45 gt 2 gt 4 gt 5 gt 1 gt 25 gt 3 gt 1 gt 274 gt 5 Minimum isa gt 4 45 The shaded step s require s s 4 the AS
283. the front of the instrument Secure them with one screw each into the standoffs Slide the 10 Low Thermal A20 Actuator and A40 Duo Decade Logic assemblies into the guides and jacks behind the A5 and 5 assemblies respectively 10 and A40 must be behind 45 and 420 must be behind 46 f Open the door on the rear of the instrument by turn ing the two screws on the door See Figure 2 3 for location of these screws 9 Slide the A13 Low Thermal Channel and A22 Actuator Channel assemblies into the rear of the instrument so that they plug into the 10 and 20 assemblies respec tively A13 must plug into 410 A22 into A20 Be sure that the P13 male connector has pin guards SIGNAL GROUND a 5 g o zd NEAR TERMINATION OF OTHER WIRE OF TWISTED PAIR REN DIS 2136 5195 A The HP i8 logic fevels are TTL compatibie i e True State dc to 0 4 V dc False State 2 5 V dc to 5 V dc NOT USED BY 3495A TW STEO PAIR WiTH 11 TWISTED PAJA WITH 0 TWISTED WITH 9 4 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 111 XS PIO TWISTED PAIR wiTH 7 08 TWISTED WITH E Section Il f hp Part Number 03495 22100 installed to prevent damage to channel terminal assembly connectors h Push the wired 14 and A24 Terminal Assemblies onto the A13 Relay Assemblies Push the wired A23 Terminal Assemblies ont
284. the handshake capabilities necessary to implement the sequence Typical handshake times for 3495 commands and instructions are given in Table 1 2 of Section 3 51 interface Clear IFC 3 52 When IFC is set LOW the HP IB is cleared and all transfer of information over the Bus halts NOTE The IFC signal does NOT clear the scanner channels It DOES clear the previously stored instructions 3 53 Scanner Bus Capabilities 3 54 The interface capabilities of the hp Model 3495A scanner are listed in Table 3 3 Table 3 3 3495A Scanner Bus Capabilities Description of Capability No source handshake capability Complete acceptor handshake capability allows the Scanner to take a byte command or data from the bus Listen No talker capability No extended taiker capability Basic listener capability allows the Scanner to be selected to listen Addressed No extended listener capability No service request capability remote focal capability No paraliel poti capability Complete device clear capability allows the Scanner to be cleared open all channels Complete device trigger capability permits the Scan ner to have its operation initiated by a controller Open Collector Drivers 3 7 Section Model 3495 GENERAL HP 1B PROGRAMMING 3 55 The Algorithm 3 56 An Algorithm is a procedure for obtaining a solution to a problem Programming HP IB instruments is made easier by
285. the logic delay block 7 D 10 DATA STORAGE BLOCK 7 D 11 The data storage block stores the channel ten s and unit s digits from the inter face and control assembly upon the decade close signal from the duo decade address block The unit s storage flip flop is cleared to an invalid digit of 15 by the decade open clear signals 7 0 12 LOGIC DELAY BLOCK 7 D 13 The logic delay block provides a small delay about 15 microseconds on the Model 3495 Model 3495 decade close signal This small delay establishes the open timer priority break betore make synchronization since the decade close signal also gates the open timer 7 0 14 TIMER BLOCK 7 D 15 The timer block establishes the open and close intervals in which relays are instructed to open and close The open cycle precedes the close cycle and is shorter in duration 220 microseconds compared to 666 microseconds A channel close instruction initiates an open interval followed by a close interval A duo decade open instruction initiates only an open interval 7 D 16 The open timer interval is initiated by the decade open signal and and execute or a decade close signal and an execute The open timer signal then holds the delayed decade close signal until the open timer interval has ended The end of the open timer interval clears the decade open signal 7 D 17 The delayed close signal is then gated to the close timer which begins the close
286. tions 1967 couple Circuitry 1961 3 Moffat Rober J Thermecouple Theory and Practice 1961 Section 4 0 Table 4 1 Recommended Test Equipment Required Capabilities Instrument HP controller capability Calculator High speed 1 0 22 switching time of option 98034A 3437A Reading rate 2 25 sec Reading rate 2 100 sec Reading rate 22 1000 sec 6217A MES 20 V de adjustabie 4329 1019 ohm range options 001 amp 003 High Resistance Meter 107 ohm range others Test Lead Accessory for R L C Meter 42738 2 pF resolution at 1 MHz 1 accuracy Meter RECON 1 mV 8 re at 1 MHz Digital 5 E 0757 0280 10 20 3101 1235 S 50 ohm termination BNC to Dual Banana Plug Adapter 2 Switch es TEST CODES S Switching Time T Thermai Offset Voltage Channel Isolation C Capacitance Frequency Response Referenced to Standard 488 1975 Option 002 with Option 100 Accessory 44413A Options 001 or 003 with Option 100 Accessory 44413A Options 004 or 005 with Option 100 Accessory 4441 Model 3495 A Model 3495 Section 4 1 INTRODUCTION 4 2 This section contains performance test procedures that can be used to verify that the 3495A meets specifications All tests require access to the option terminal connectors thr
287. ture Tg This is a software process to compen sate for the thermal emf generated by the reference junc tion temperature Remember the result desired is the suring junction temperature d Thermocouple voltage is measured Vs e Correction is made by adding compensation voltage to thermocouple voltage Vs VFT NOTE Vg is negative if TR gt 0 f Measurement junction temperature determined from corresponding By adding the appropriate compensation voltage the NBS thermocouple values may be used with any arbitrary refer ence temperature Since the correction is made mathemat ically the reference connector can be used for any thermo Model 3495 Section HI 73 METAL EE Tyo CHANNEL 9 to 9 to METAL sg 10 Veo a e e 9 i TO 9 SCANNER 7 LE CHANNEL TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR Mills id CHANNEL 0 TR ISOTHERMAL ENVIRONMENT Figure 3 16 Reference Connectors A Functional View couple type or mixture of types A table or mathematical model of specific thermocouple characteristics provides data for Steps and f of the corrective procedure 3 117 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION 3 118 The reference connectors are constructed to mini mize temperature differences between the HI and LOW input terminals and the temperature
288. u HOI Can CAD MVM MCI HOMM Cha WFD MO HSI gayre HOT HOL Ove i Hure MOT HSH x E 2 bag A l ioes Tal je 1 05 2085 i 28 ME a i so vex 268 a vex U 58 emi X vot vor 5 vex M eet VEY HO SUME MOD w Ode 6 Or 1 T E 7 98 Ord 94 9 4 Bi Od Gre Ost x Quz j eed 4 1 H YHT i AONO T i VES i vius i on EM NN Em is os ANS OS i d A A ab 3 i RE i i i i EN i j xis A214 1 Bild e n en ee nm tme af hl d sa M Eh Q i i AC N ABMS Azt Co i tH 1 Le ni ey a Spencer he A O A A 23 T s 35012 AV TRY i MG HSM a ER a ET EI IA AAA AAA SC tee 1 j pae mE S 4 A E SOU p NUES SOMOS Am
289. ver is assigned sequentially and is different for each instrument The con tents of this manual apply to instruments with the serial number prefix es listed under SERIAL NUMBERS on the title page The letter separating prefix and suffix designates the country in which the instrument was manufactured A U S A West Germany J Japan U United Kingdom 1 5 Also listed on the title page of this manual is a micro fiche part number This number can be used to order 4 X 6 inch microfilm transparencies of the manual Each micro fiche contains up to 96 photo duplicates of the manual pages The microfiche package also includes the latest Manual Changes supplement as well as pertinent Service Notes 1 6 MANUAL CHANGES 1 7 As errata and instrument changes accumulate manual changes may become necessary Accumulated change infor mation is generally incorporated into the manual by means of a yellow manual change supplement or set of revised pages 1 8 The manual change supplement is identified by the manual print date and part number which the supplement applies to Both of these are located on the manual title page We suggest that you periodically request this compli mentary supplement to keep your manual up to date 1 9 Revised pages are identified with a revision letter next to the page number Sets of revised pages are accompanied by an updated manual revision index and title page 1 10 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 1
290. ves state 4 when all other A10 assemblies reach state 4 and make Relay Opening Flag false 7 B 28 State 6 7 B 29 Guard Relay Close signal transfers the unit s channel digit from 011 to the Guard Relay Control U8 flip flops The four line binary code from U8 through GR4 is decoded into a single line signal by Relay Select U7 to close a guard relay The unit s display digit is driven directly by U8 with the binary coded lines UDI through 1 04 7 B 30 State 7 7 31 High Low Relay Close and Full Relay Voltage signals turn on Q2 and Q1 to close the high low relay on the particular Relay Select line that was driven low in state 6 7 B 32 When the state machine goes back to state 3 the Full Relay Voltage signal goes false to reduce heat rise in the high low relay coil but not open the relay The reduced voltage on the coil also allows faster relay opening on another cycle 7 B 33 SERVICE MATERIAL 7 B 34 The following pages include service material for low thermal decade assemblies Included is a conventional troubleshooting tree Figure 7 B 4 replaceable parts lists Table 7 B 1 SA test procedure flowchart Figure 7 B 5 component locator Figure 7 6 10 block diagram Figure 7 7 and schematics Figure 7 B 8 Section VII 7 B 5 Section Vii 7 B 6 Relays Close But Dis play Does Not Function Properly Check B C D 7 Seg ment Decoders And Dis plays On The Boar
291. wing messages requesting the first and last channel to be tested LAST CHANNEL BE TESTED FIRST CHANNEL TO BE TESTED The operator must input a channel number between O and 79 then press execute after each message NOTE if the inputs are in the specified numerical range or if the first channel number larger than the last channel number the display will be INCORRECT INPUT and the controller will repeat the message Valid inputs will allow a printout of the Channels under test as shown below CHAMHELS 11 THRU 12 During the actual testing of each specific channel the controller will determine if any of the relays in the channels under test are shorted or resistive A successful test would cause the program to printout tres Ht a 1 11 f if a relay is resistive the program will printout an error message identifying the specific channel containing the relay The program will continue to cycle through each of the channels until all relays have been tested An example printout is shown below wakes bre ie Ht mo ap an t few rejas E ol de dano m She tI 12 4 a ver qs ore 1144 34444 aman 444 4 ort 4 v 444 age n daa t w Abas 4444 Li 1 al 1 4 1 1 m 1 1 4 11 m
292. xamples of wiring the connectors to best suit your needs 2 1 DM 2 22 Wiring the A14 Terminal Assembly Option 001 2 21 After determining channel connections addressing schemes and guard connections for each decade accessory the terminal assemblies may be wired 2 23 Four terminal strips on the A14 Terminal Assembly Opt 003 Opt 004 Opt 002 Opt 001 2066 2 965 Figure 2 2 Location of Option Assemblies R4 44t FALLA Section H Model 3495 Table 2 1 Factory Installation of Options option Clear Open Address Close Address None Close Address O through 3 Left Left to Right Right Left two per side provide connection points for ten channels of Low and Guard lines Two sets of common terminals one per side are also available on the assembly The terminal assignments are shown in Section Service Group B Close Address 0 2 4 6 Close Address Left to Hight 2 24 To connect wires to the terminals follow this procedure a Loosen the terminal set screw b Strip approximately 3 16 inch insulation from the wire to be connected E CAUTION Bare wire lengths should be kept to a minimum to avoid shorted lines c Insert the bare wire end into the proper terminal d Tighten the terminal set screw to secure the connection e Verify that the connection is s
293. y The relay select circuitry is a one out of twenty decoder which sinks current through the selected relay coil 7 D 24 The source for the relay current is a two level relay coil drive circuit consisting of current sources Q1 and Q2 Q2 supplies the steady state relay holding current and is con trolled by the close timer CT signal Q1 supplies additional switching current during the open timer OT interval 7 D 25 DETAILED OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION 7 D 26 U7 serves as duo decade address select decoder by logically or ing the decade select lines in pairs This establishes 4 duo decade address possibilities of 00 through 19 20 through 39 40 through 59 and 60 through 79 Switch 1 implements a low true and operation between the duo decade select signals and the selected option CLOSE and OPEN addresses Section VH 7 3 Section 7 D 4 7 D 27 Upon a CLOSE address U14B sets the decade close signal high which latches the unit s digit and ten s digit information from the A4 or A8 controller assembly The dc signal also clocks the U15A decade close flip flop setting the dc signal at TP4 An execute signal gates DC through U17D to the open timer initializing the open timer interval the length of which is determined by R13 x C6 7 D 28 The open timer OT signal latches the unit s digit and ten s digit information into 012 and U10 respectively providing a second level of storage The OT signa

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

1 - Nidek  P68 Installer / Owners Manual R-7  Manual e-line Benchmark  ZEBRA SP - Euro  Water to water chillers and heat pumps Aermec NBW Installation  TCL-Digital L32D3300C 32" HD-ready Black LED TV  保着正規定 シュレッダー PSBHM 保証書 ー S  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file